JVC CD Player KD AR770 User Manual
CD RECEIVER  
KD-AR770/KD-G720  
KD-AR770/KD-G720  
KD-AR770/KD-G720  
RECEPTOR CON CD  
RECEPTEUR CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.  
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 8.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model  
No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or  
bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information  
for future reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0354-001A  
[J]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G725  
KD-G725  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
6
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0355-005A  
[UT]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to use the MODE button  
How to reset your unit  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
Warning:  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 18 – 21).  
Control panel ...................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
6
6
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
7
Press repeatedly.  
Disc/USB memory operations.............  
Playing a disc in the unit ......................................  
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................  
Playing from a USB memory .................................  
8
8
8
9
Press either  
one.  
Sound adjustments........................... 12  
General settings — PSM ................... 13  
Title assignment .............................. 15  
iPod®/D. player operations ............... 16  
Other external component operations... 18  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 25  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
Display window  
; Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
a Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
s Main display  
d Tr (track) indicator  
f LOUD (loudness) indicator  
g Source display / Volume level indicator  
h Playback mode / item indicators—  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 EQ (equalizer) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
j Track type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
k Playback source indicators*—  
CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected  
as the playback source.  
DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.  
l EQ (equalizer) indicator  
/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
(disc),  
(folder),  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r MO (monaural) button  
t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
y Number buttons  
u RPT (repeat) button  
i RND (random) button  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 13).  
o
4/¢  
buttons  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a  
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
Caution:  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page...  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Getting started  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
13 and 14.  
1
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
2
!
⁄
For FM/AM tuner  
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Adjust the volume.  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Volume level appears.  
Volume level indicator  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! on the left...  
1
3 Finish the procedure.  
To check the current clock  
time while the power is  
turned off  
To check other information  
while listening to the radio  
Clock = Station name*  
=Frequency =(back to the  
beginning)  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
* FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station,  
“NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a  
station, see page 15.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
~
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Ÿ
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with  
sufficient signal strength.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
2
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
1
2
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
~
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 14), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
or  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-  
compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
Ÿ
USB input terminal  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it  
out from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
Continued on the next page...  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA/USB) directly  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
1
2
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG ON” (see page 14)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]  
TRE*1 (treble)  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
[R06 to F06]  
BAL*3 (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
[L06 to R06]  
LOUD*1 (loudness)  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
+01  
–02  
+01  
00  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
(Classical music)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]  
HIP HOP  
1
(Funk or rap music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
JAZZ  
+03  
OFF  
(Jazz music)  
2
3
4
5
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer  
output.  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 14 for details.)  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.  
1
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [6].  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
1 – 12, [6]  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
00 – 59, [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the  
source, playback pauses during telephone muting.  
SCROLL*1  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
Continued on the next page...  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
WOOFER  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to  
the subwoofer.  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
EXT IN*2  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod  
External input  
or a JVC D. player, [16].  
: To use any other external component, [18].  
EXT IN  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing  
Tag display  
MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power  
of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from  
being damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
:
[Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo  
effect may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
1
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD or USB.  
2
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
Title assignment  
character position.  
You can assign titles to station frequencies and  
CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
Sources  
Maximum number of characters  
finish entering the title.  
Station  
frequencies  
Up to 8 characters (up to 30  
station frequencies including  
both FM and AM)  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Up to 32 characters (up to 30  
discs)  
CDs/CD-CH*  
*
You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an  
MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
1 Select the sources.  
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When you select “CD“ as the source  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for  
controlling an iPod.  
To pause*1 or  
stop*2 playback  
To resume  
playback, press it  
again.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next  
or previous tracks  
Caution:  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
1 Enter the main menu.  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 14.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
For iPod:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
!
Adjust the volume.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
7
Random play  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
ALBM RND*4  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play  
D. player.  
• Holding  
4 /¢  
can skip 10  
=
On” of the  
items at a time.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
–
5 seconds.  
–
4
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
*
For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
Selecting the playback modes  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
One” for the  
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
All” for the  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More about this unit  
Other external component  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
For listening to the the USB memory, see pages  
9 – 11; For iPod, or D.player, see pages 16 and  
17.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
~
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 14  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
Adjust the volume.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
To check other information while listening to  
an external component  
Inserting a disc  
Clock Ô EXT IN  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
Continued on the next page...  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
Ejecting a disc  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories or some files due to their  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30  
station frequencies or 30 discs, “NAMEFULL”  
appears. Delete unwanted titles before  
assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG-  
2.5)  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected  
to this unit, all operations from the iPod or  
D. player are disabled. Perform all operations  
from this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 13). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
Maintenance  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
How to handle discs  
Warped disc  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
Center holder  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
Stick-on label  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been  
formatted correctly. The files included in the  
USB memory are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy the MP3/WMA track again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page...  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 16).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Format:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminal: CD changer  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, CT  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G725  
Installation/Connection Manual  
ϰ༬ꢀ௥ો˿̱  
GET0355-010A  
[UT]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ꢁ ˁ̂  
ENGLISH  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
ʹጅ෮̈́՟·
ޠڈ
ꢀ12 V é
࠸
๩ોϚ
څ
ྑກԧ஁éϨ
س
઱
ڄ
ԾቩԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ
࠱
ɾ
ࡴ
ྐ  
Ꮻ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚꢀJVCꢀԆԾ
ࡖ
ᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé  
ᙲѿ  
WARNINGS  
޴
Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃
ۮ
çᔃළྐЖ
࠷ڄ
๨çՓӕ
׿
Љྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
ëꢁϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ
څ
Ϛሉ
ࡍ
๙ોгԿԾê  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
ٍิ!  
ëꢀӕۘᎳീӦಗ
޴
ᖃ
࠷׆
ம
ڄࡩ
ۘᎳീéϨ
س
ۘᎳീ໩ગጛᖢçቁώꢀJVCꢀԆԾ
ࡖ
ᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é  
ëꢀ݈໯֜
ۮ
໯ಙᑵ዇
ڄ
ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ
ؠ
ꢀ50 Wçմ
ۇ
ӏ
޴
ꢀ4 Ω - 8 ΩéϨ
س
ఛʨ̷୊ʮ
ؠ
 
ꢀ ꢀꢀ50 Wçቁቆओꢀ“AMP GAIN”ꢀ௎
ࡩ׆
ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢéꢂ੉ኌ՟·ი
ا
ए
ڄ
୶ꢀ18ꢀ
ࡗ
éꢃ  
ëꢀ
޴
Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸уͶՠΈྐለ
ڄ
ၷʪé  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealers.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
ëꢀʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ
࠱
᙮ညಞᇊ̕é  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
ಞᇊ̕  
ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො!  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
ëꢁ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸ
ࡍ
๒ᖣê  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
ëꢀϚӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃
ۮ
çᐓ
ފ
઱ԆԾʕ
ڄ
ಙᑵ዇ለཔé  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Έ
ء
ϰ༬֝௥ો
څ
ྒྷέ჋  
Parts list for installation and connection  
ʓλྒάᎲʹጅಏաéࠜЉέщ᎝းçቁΘո
۽
༿઱
ڄ
0<)ԆԾ
ࡖ
ᛏ໩ኀੋé  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
D
A / B  
C
Trim plate  
༫ྟख  
Hard case/Control panel  
ഢୢꢁ૆վ
ػࡒ
 
Sleeve  
͙
ࢭ
ጅೋ  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
ྐཔ௤૊·
ڄ
਎ለӧ  
Washer (ø5)  
࿑੡ꢀ(ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
ᕬ
׆
ᒘ͹ꢀ(M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
ႌ֣ᒘनꢀ(M5 × 20 mm)  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
ጁሗՎ኏࿑  
Handles  
ػ
଍
ܓ
ӕ˾  
Remote controller  
ჲ૆዇  
Battery  
ྐЖ  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
ϰ༬ꢁꢂ༬௏éׇ֤ϛᄮ
ؼڸ
˗ꢃ  
ʓ
ڄࡒ
࿌༱
ڷ
Εʄյ
ڄܓ
ϯ༫ദҺéϨ
س
઱Љ੕ᖅç
׻
ᄔ
࠱
Љᘕ਎
ࢭ
˔ά
ڄ
ཊऄçቁώꢀJVC  
ԆԾ
ࡖ
ᛏ˜ኀੋ
׻
਎
ࢭ
˔άաᏻ˙͌༿੕é  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
ëꢀϨ
س
઱ʿ঻ᇧ
׆
Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत
ڄ
ӑிʆ
࢜
գϯ༫é  
Do the required electrical connections.  
නм
׿
ᄔ
ڄ
ྐཔ௤૊é  
1
*
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage the  
fuse on the rear.  
1
઱቎৹ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ
࠱
 
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
๑ᖢ
נ
௰
ڄ
ۘᎳീé  
Ҿᛮጅೋ
ߴڄ
дçӕ͙
ࢭ
ጅೋԕ֣Ϛᄭ  
ڷ
ػ
˖é  
Removing the unit  
؜
։͵ጆ  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Ϛ
؛
ֈʹጅ
ۮ
çᏻઅʹጅ݈௰
ڄ
֣
׆
֜௤૊௰˜ᖑළé  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
ݝ
࿌
׿
Εçઅղ̕
ػ
଍
ܓ
ӕ˾಍ʈ̿ᆥç೸݈ძᗌ  
ϙનղ਴ώ͙؁ղ̕ӕ˾çʹጅᎲ˃؁̳é
 
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ࠝˀՠΈ͚
ࢮ
ጆೌϰ༬͵ጆ  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
When using the optional stay / ࠝ᎛Έ́ᆊ
ނ
 
Stay (option)  
̀ᆉ
ށ
ꢀꢂ᎚·
ڄ
ꢃ  
̣ᕙΉ೻ꢀ(TOYOTA) ԆԾ
޴
բ ꢀ࡛ζ֊̳ԆԾЂ
ࡖ
ጅç೸݈અʹጅ༫ʈմ
ڏ
̳
ڄ
т໯é  
Fire wall  
Վ̑
ػ
 
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
*2 Not supplied for this unit.  
*2 ʿᎲʹጅಏաé  
Dashboard  
ᄭ
ػڷ
 
Bracket*2  
Ё
ࣙ
*2  
Screw (option)  
ᒘീਐꢀꢂ᎚·
ڄ
ꢃ  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
ڏ
ೋ  
Bracket*2  
Ё
ࣙ
*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
!ꢀӕʹጅϯ༫ϚЁ
ࣙ
ʕइçੀͫ՟·ꢀ8 mmꢀ
ڄۂ
ᒘീਐéϨ՟·ཫ
ڄۂ
ᒘീਐç๡๑ᖢʹጅé  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲
ؠ
ꢀ30˚ꢀ
ڄ
Դܾé  
ٍิꢁ  
ݮ
ᄑ૜ਜ  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
•ꢀۙᎴുጜᔄê  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
߹и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ
ݵ
Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧ%  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
•ꢀྑກˀ়ો௣ê  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ
ݵ
Ѵ૊ʕ%  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
•ꢀಚᑶወԆЊᑶ
ࡗ
ê  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ
ݵ
Ѵഠཔ%  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
•ꢀᑶ
ࡗ
͜ॳê  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ
ݵ
Ѵ૊ϙ%  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
ಙᑵ዇
ڄ
ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ
࠷ڄ
๨ꢀ(–) 
ݵ
Ѵθψ૊ϙ%  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
•ꢀ዇
ࡗ
ʹᓿ
ࡗ
ᛐê  
*ꢀ݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ
ݵ
Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹
ڄ
ྐለ௤૊%  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
•ꢀ͵ጆഛᇋê  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ
ݵ
Ѵ૊ϙ%  
*ꢀᐓ
ފ
ಙᑵ዇
ڄ
ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ
࠷ڄ
๨ꢀ(–) 
ݵ
Ѵθψ૊ϙ%  
•ꢁ͵ጆҭθˀ়ይіê  
*ꢀ઱
ݵ
Ѵʵ໩
ࡌ
໯઱
ڄ
ጅஇ%  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ˁ̂  
ENGLISH  
ྑཕ௥ો  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Typical connections / ն
څܔ
ોሉ̅٘  
A
ોሉ
ۯ
ꢁ!ꢁ̥அᐓ
ފ
ԆԾ˖
ڄ
ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ
ڄ
૊ለ๡዗
ࠓ
ʹጅᘷ
ࡌ
๑ᖢé  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause  
serious damage to this unit.  
ྐʍለ
ڄ
˺ለ֜ԾԽ
ڄ
௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ
׿
ʿψé  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 ՜ຖʓ࿌
׿
Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ
ڄ
ᖄи዗ለé  
2ꢀઅ˭ለ
ڄ
ྐለ௤૊৹գé  
3ꢀఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ
ڄ
಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
૊вඟ
ࡌ
ј
ࡖ
ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌
ڷ
 
)
Antenna Connector  
˭ለ௤૊዇  
)
15 A fuse  
15 AꢀۘᎳീ  
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
ʿᎲʹጅಏաé  
Ignition switch  
ᓭ̑ළᘕ  
1
Rear ground terminal  
ʹጅ݈
ࠌ
૊ϙၷʪ  
Black  
෨и  
Line out (see diagram  
᎔̳ၷʪꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌
ڷ
ꢀ ꢀꢃ  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
૊в
ہ
ᚙᝂ
׻
ԆԾ
נ
ᇟ  
To external components (see diagram  
в͙૊இάꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌
ڷ
 
)
)
Yellow *2  
෦и*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖
ۈڄ
ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔
ؠ
Ծ༫ྐЖ
ߟ
௤૊  
ꢂ·
ؠ
अཔᓭ̑ළᘕꢃꢀꢂ
׆ݔ
ꢀ12 Vꢃ  
Fuse block  
ۘᎳീవ˔  
Red  
߹и  
2
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
power cannot be turned on.  
ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ
ٶ
ٜᐓ
ފ
˃
ۮ
ç  
ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖
ۈڄ
ᚙၷʪ  
*
ꢀ
Blue  
ᕇи  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
૊вбੂ˭ለꢀꢂࠜЉ༫௎ꢃꢀꢂఛʨꢀ250 mAꢃ  
Blue with white stripe  
ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
௤૊в͏ɾ
ށ
ᄭ዇
ڄ
ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢂఛʨꢀ200 mA ꢃ  
Orange with white stripe  
ዻиઘЉΎи଍ঙ  
To car light control switch  
௤૊вԆԾԾጜ૆վළᘕ  
Brown  
ሶи  
To cellular phone system  
૊в˾ጅԦ஀  
White with black stripe  
ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ  
Gray with black stripe  
НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ  
Gray  
Ни  
Green with black stripe  
ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ  
Green  
ႋи  
Purple with black stripe  
ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ  
Purple  
ാи  
White  
Ύи  
Left speaker (front)  
ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ
ۮ
໯ꢃ  
Right speaker (front)  
͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ
ۮ
໯ꢃ  
Left speaker (rear)  
ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢃ  
Right speaker (rear)  
͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢃ  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwooferƅ௥ો͚ો
؟
ʩወ֝ƅ
׼
ච
ࡍ
љ
ࡗ
ಚᑶወ  
઱̣̈́௤૊
؞
ʨ዇̣˥ঠ઱
ڄ
ԆԾΘᝂᑵԦ஀é  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
ëꢀઅჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂꢀ֜մ̧༫໯ʕ
ڄ
ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊৹գç̣
۔
̣̈́௢ཫʹጅනм  
ꢀ
ჲ૆é  
ëꢀઆಚᑶወ֝͵ጆᔄෆèκોʖ̸ୋ
؟
ʩወêઆ͵ጆ
څ
ಚᑶወોሉ
؟
໰ˀΈê  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Remote lead  
ჲ૆዗ለ  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-
ܓ
௤૊዗ለꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂ  
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any  
௤૊в͏ɾ
ށ
ᄭ዇
ڄ
ჲ૆዗ለ
׻
бੂ˭ለꢀꢁࠜЉ༫௎ꢂ  
Rear speakers  
݈໯ಙᑵ዇  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC ̸ୋ
؟
ʩወ  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC ̸ୋ
؟
ʩወ  
Subwoofer  
ඟ
ࡌ
ј
ࡖ
ಙᑵ዇  
Front speakers  
ۮ
໯ಙᑵ዇  
Front speakers  
ۮ
໯ಙᑵ዇  
3
3
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to  
the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the  
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
અϙለႩ
ہ
ᚙԾᝂ
ږ׻
ԆԾ
נ
ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳  
ԅЉூٛွᕒႵꢀꢁϨ
س
ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊ྐለ
ۮ
çઅ  
ٛွս̓ꢂéϨ
س
ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC ̸ୋ
؟
ʩወ  
4
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
ۑ
༙ྐងꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ  
4
C Connecting the external components / ௥ોյ̨͚௱ஈέ  
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CDꢀಘၫወéApple iPod® 
׼
ꢀJVC D. player  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“CHANGER” (ಘၫወ) (੊ኍՠΈკ
ب
ऐ
څ
୷ꢀ14 
ࡘ
ê)  
/
You can connect these components as illustrated below.  
The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
઱̣̈́નʓ࿌
׿
Ε௤૊௠՗இάé  
઱̣̈́՟·
ࡒߍ
ቱ਎዇ꢀꢁʿ਎కꢂꢀ—ꢀKS-PD100 (iPodꢀ·ꢂꢀ
׻
ꢀKS-PD500ꢀꢁ*ꢃ playerꢀ·ꢂꢀ௤૊ꢀiPod*5 
׻
ꢀ*ꢃ playeré  
CAUTION / ʯ˼î  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ  
• Before connecting the external components , make sure that the unit is turned off.  
• ௤૊͙௰இά˃
ۮ
çζᇧ
׆
ʹጅʵ໩ᘕ௻é  
or  
׻
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
JVC D. player ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ  
JVC CD changer  
JVC CDꢀಘၫወ  
CD changer jack  
CDꢀಗၪ዇಍
ࣙ
 
5
6
6
*
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
*
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer  
઱
ڄ
ꢀCD ಗၪ዇਎క
ڄ
௤૊ྐង  
5
iPod 
ݵ
ꢀApple Computer, Inc. ăᙧ
س
ྐ༃˙͌ĄϚ
ࠀ
੢˪մ̧੢
ࣁ
ٌ̰
ڄ
ੋᆤé  
Other external component / յ̨͚௱ஈέ  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“EXT IN” (͚௱᎕ʉ) (੊ኍՠΈკ
ب
ऐ
څ
୷ꢀ14 
ࡘ
ê)  
External component  
͚௱ஈέ  
CD changer jack  
CDꢀಗၪ዇಍
ࣙ
 
External component  
͚௱ஈέ  
7
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
ྐཔ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U57 ꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ  
7
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
3.5 mm Θᝂᑵਁі಍
ࣙ
 
8
8
*
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
AUXꢀ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U58 (ʿᎲʹጅಏա)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully  
before operation, to ensure your complete  
understanding and to obtain the best possible  
performance from the unit.  
CONTENTS  
Control panel  
—
KD-AR770 and KD-G720........  
4
5
Remote controller — RM-RK50 ..............  
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
7
7
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 23 – 26).  
Radio operations ..............................  
8
Disc/USB memory operations............. 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 10  
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 10  
Playing from a USB memory ................................. 10  
Press briefly.  
Sound adjustments........................... 13  
General settings — PSM ................... 14  
Title assignment .............................. 17  
Satellite radio operations.................. 18  
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 21  
Other external component operations... 23  
More about this unit ......................... 23  
Maintenance .................................... 26  
Troubleshooting............................... 27  
Specifications................................... 31  
Press repeatedly.  
Press either  
one.  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
:
Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-AR770 and KD-G720  
Parts identification  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r MO (monaural) button  
t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
5 Display window  
y Number buttons  
u RPT (repeat) button  
i RND (random) button  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 EQ (equalizer) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
o
4/¢  
buttons  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display window  
; Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
j Track type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
k Playback source indicators*—CH (CD  
changer), DISC (built-in CD player)  
l EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
a Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
s Main display  
d Tr (track) indicator  
f LOUD (loudness) indicator  
g Source display / Volume level indicator  
h Playback mode / item indicators—  
/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 15).  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
(disc),  
(folder),  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Caution:  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
Continued on the next page  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or  
XM) radio:  
– Changes the categories.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod or a  
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
®
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
Main elements and features  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to the satellite radio:  
– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed  
and held.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is  
on.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
@
Adjust the volume.  
Getting started  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
Volume level appears.  
Ÿ
Volume level indicator  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 13 and 14.)  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
1
*
You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
Only for KD-AR770.  
2
*
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
!
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
For FM/AM tuner  
To turn off the power  
For SIRIUS radio  
For XM radio  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Radio operations  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
14 – 16.  
~
1
2
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
1
2
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Listening to a preset station  
Storing stations in memory  
1
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
or  
2
3
To check other information while listening to  
the radio  
Clock = Station name* =  
Frequency = (back to the  
beginning)  
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
* If no name is assigned to a station,  
“NO NAME” appears. To assign a name to a  
station, see page 17.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
~
USB input terminal  
To stop play and eject the disc  
Ÿ
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.  
USB memory  
~
If a USB memory has been attached...  
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 16), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it  
out from the unit.  
Cautions:  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA/USB) directly  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
3
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or a  
USB memory  
*
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 16)  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
: Clock with the current track number  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
Preset values  
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
(Rock or disco music)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
–02  
+01  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*1 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
POPS (Light music)  
DISC RPT*2 : All tracks of the current disc.  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+03  
OFF  
7 Random play  
Adjusting the sound  
Mode  
Plays at random  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
FLDR RND*1 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
1
2
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
MAG RND*2 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
1
Indication pattern changes  
as you adjust the level.  
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
2
*
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
Continued on the next page  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)  
items (except “SID”) listed in the table that  
follows.  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
1
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
BAL*3 (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
2 Select a PSM item.  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
SUB. W*4 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
Ex.: When you select “DIMMER”  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*5]  
Adjust the volume.  
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
2
3
4
5
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer  
output.  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 16 for details.)  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [8].  
Display demonstration  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
CLK ADJ*1  
Clock adjustment  
1 – 12, [8]  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
00 – 59, [8]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted  
using the clock data provided via the satellite radio  
channel.  
OFF  
: Cancels.  
T-ZONE*1, *2  
Select your residential area from one of the following time zones for  
clock adjustment.  
Time zone  
EASTERN [Initial] “ ATLANTIC “ NEWFOUND “ ALASKA “  
PACIFIC “ MOUNTAIN “ CENTRAL “ (back to the beginning)  
DST*1, *2  
Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.  
ON  
: [Initial]; Activates daylight savings time.  
: Cancels.  
Daylight savings time  
OFF  
SID*3  
SIRIUS ID  
The 12-digit SIRIUS identification number scrolls on the display  
5 seconds after “SID” is selected, [18].  
• Press SEL to resume the previous display.  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
TEL*4  
Telephone muting  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
while using a cellular phone.  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the source,  
playback pauses during telephone muting.  
SCROLL*5  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
Scroll  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
1
*
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.  
Displayed only when “CLK ADJ” is set to “AUTO.”  
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.  
Only for KD-AR770.  
2
3
4
5
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Continued on the next page  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
WOOFER  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
LINE ADJ*6  
VOL 00 – VOL 05 : Adjust the line input level properly when an  
external component is connected to the LINE IN plugs.  
[Initial: VOL 00]  
Line input level  
EXT IN*7  
External input  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [10], a JVC  
compatible satellite (SIRIUS/XM) tuner, [18], or an  
Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [21].  
EXT IN  
: To use any other external component than the above,  
[23].  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/  
WMA tracks, [12].  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power  
of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from  
being damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
OFF*1  
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect  
may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
WIDE  
AREA  
AREA US : [Initial]; When using in North/Central/South America.  
AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.  
Tuner channel interval  
AREA SA : When using in South American countries where FM  
interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.  
AREA EU : When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set  
to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).  
6
7
*
*
Only for KD-AR770.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, USB, or LINE IN (only  
for KD-AR770).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
Title assignment  
character position.  
You can assign titles to station frequencies and  
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer).  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
Sources  
Maximum number of characters  
finish entering the title.  
Station  
frequencies  
Up to 8 characters (up to 30  
station frequencies including  
both FM and AM)  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Up to 32 characters (up to 30  
discs)  
CDs/CD-CH*  
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an  
MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
1 Select the sources.  
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When “CD“ is selected as the source  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Activate your SIRIUS subscription after  
connection:  
1
Satellite radio operations  
This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready—  
compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio and  
XM Satellite radio.  
2
Before operating your satellite radio:  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with  
your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite  
radio.  
JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS  
channels.  
• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are  
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Inc.  
Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the  
preset channel, CH184.  
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all  
related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,  
Inc.  
3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 15.  
4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at  
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to  
activate your subscription, or you can  
call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-  
SIRIUS (7474).  
“SUB UPDT PRESS ANY KEY” scrolls  
on the display once subscription has been  
completed.  
Listening to the satellite radio  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
Activate your XM subscription after  
connection:  
• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available  
before activation.  
1
• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link  
Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite  
radio.  
TM  
• XMDirect Universal Tuner Box—Using  
a JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100:  
not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite  
radio.  
2
GCI (Global Control Information) update:  
• If channels are updated after subscription,  
updating starts automatically.  
“UPDATING” flashes and no sound can be  
heard.  
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.  
• During update, you cannot operate your  
satellite radio.  
TM  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box starts  
updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1”  
is tuned in automatically.  
3 Check your XM Satellite radio  
ID labelled on the casing of the  
TM  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box, or  
tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 20).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Contact XM Satellite radio on  
the internet at <http://xmradio.  
com/activation/> to activate your  
subscription, or you can call 1-800-  
XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).  
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one  
of the available channels (Channel 4 or  
higher).  
Listening to the XM Satellite radio  
1
2
Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio  
3 Select a channel for listening.  
1
Holding the button changes the channels  
rapidly.  
2
Searching for category/channel  
You can search for programs by category  
(Category Search) or channel number (Channel  
Search).  
3 Select a category.  
• In Category Search, you can tune in to the  
channels of the selected category. Category  
Search begins from the currently selected  
channel. The selected channel number flashes  
on the display.  
• In Channel Search, you can tune in to  
all channels (including non-categorised  
channels).  
You can tune in to all the channels of every  
category by selecting “ALL.”  
Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,  
ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to  
enjoy only the channels from the selected  
category.  
1 Select a category (Category Search).  
• For Channel Search, skips  
this step.  
4 Select a channel for listening.  
Holding the button changes the channels  
rapidly.  
• When changing the category or channel,  
invalid and unsubscribed channels are  
skipped.  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select a channel for listening.  
Storing channels in memory  
You can preset six channels for each band.  
Ex.: Storing a channel into preset number 4.  
Current channel number  
1 Tune in to a channel you want.  
2
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Ex.: When you select “COUNTRY” for Category Search  
If no operation is done for about  
15 seconds, Category Search is canceled.  
In Channel Search, channel name and  
channel number appear on the display  
during search.  
Listening to a preset channel  
1 Select either SIRIUS Satellite radio or  
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed  
channels are skipped.  
XM Satellite radio.  
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID  
While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or  
“XM3,” select “Channel 0.”  
2
3 Select the preset channel (1 – 6) you  
want.  
The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and  
the 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.  
To cancel the ID number display, select any  
channel other than “Channel 0.”  
To change the display information while  
listening to a channel  
Clock = Category name = Channel name = Artist  
name = Composer name* = Song/program name/  
title = (back to the beginning)  
* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
!
⁄
Adjust the volume.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 13 and 14.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for  
®
controlling an iPod.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To pause*1 or stop*2  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
playback  
To resume playback,  
press it again.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
Caution:  
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
To go to the next or  
previous tracks  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
Preparations:  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 16.  
2
~
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Selecting the playback modes  
1 Enter the main menu.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Now the 5/∞/ 4/¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*1.  
7
1
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about  
5 seconds.  
ONE RPT  
– When you confirm the selection of a  
track.  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode = One” for the  
D. player.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the  
iPod or “Repeat Mode = All” for the D.  
player.  
For iPod:  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
7
Random play  
3 Confirm the selection.  
ALBM RND*2  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
SONG RND/RND ON  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play = On” of the D.  
player.  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
• Holding  
4/¢  
can skip 10  
items at a time.  
2
*
For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other external component More about this unit  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
For listening to the USB memory, see pages  
10 – 13; For Satellite radio, iPod, or D. player,  
see pages 18 – 22.  
~
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 16  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
Adjust the volume.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 13 and 14.)  
To check other information while listening to  
an external component  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
Clock Ô EXT IN  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a disc  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• Do not insert 8 cm (3-3/16") discs (single CD)  
and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.)  
into the loading slot.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
Ejecting a disc  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories or some files due to their  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30  
station frequencies or 30 discs, “NAMEFULL”  
appears. Delete unwanted titles before  
assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 - 8 kHz, (MPEG-2.5)  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
This unit can play back MP3 files recorded  
in VBR (variable bit rate).  
Satellite radio operations  
• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio  
PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS  
radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to  
the CD changer jack on the rear.  
By turning on/off the power of the unit, you  
can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you  
cannot control it from this unit.  
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or  
to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».  
• For the latest channel listings and  
programming information, or to sign up for  
XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.  
com».  
•
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Continued on the next page  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iPod® or D. player operations  
Moisture condensation  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all  
operations from the iPod or D. player are  
disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 15). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Center holder  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Maintenance  
To play new discs  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connector  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
Warped disc  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 12).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
Continued on the next page  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted  
correctly. The files included in the USB memory  
are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO  
SUBSCRIBE” scrolls on the display  
while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite  
radio.  
Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page  
18).  
• No sound can be heard.  
“UPDATING” appears on the  
display.  
The unit is updating the channel information and  
it takes a few minutes to complete.  
• Either “NO SIGNAL” scrolls or  
“NO SIGNL” appears on the display.  
Move to an area where signals are stronger.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
• Either “NO ANTENNA” scrolls or  
“ANTENNA” appears on the display.  
• “NO CH” appears on the display for  
about 5 seconds, then returns to the  
previous display while listening to  
the SIRIUS Satellite radio.  
No broadcast on the selected channel.  
Select another channel or continue listening to the  
previous channel.  
No text information for the selected channel.  
• “NO (information)*” scrolls on the  
display while listening to the SIRIUS  
Satellite radio.  
• “---” appears on the display while  
listening to the XM Satellite radio.  
• “---” appears on the display for  
about 2 seconds, then returns to the  
previous channel while listening to  
the XM Satellite radio.  
Selected channel is no longer available or is  
unauthorized.  
Select another channel or continue listening to the  
previous channel.  
* NO CATEGORY, NO ARTIST, NO COMPOSER, and NO SONG/PROGRAM  
Continued on the next page  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display  
while listening to the XM Satellite  
radio.  
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.  
Select another channel or continue listening to the  
previous channel.  
• “LOADING” appears on the display  
while listening to the XM Satellite  
radio.  
The unit is loading the channel information  
and audio. Text information are temporarily  
unavailable.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
• Satellite radio does not work at all.  
Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio correctly  
and reset this unit.  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
•
Change the battery.  
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 21).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Power Output:  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at  
4 Ω and ≤ 1% THD+N  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
KD-AR770: 4.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
KD-G720: 2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminals:  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
CD changer  
LINE IN plugs (only for KD-AR770)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
(7-3/16" × 2-1/16" × 6")  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz  
or 200 kHz)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Panel Size (approx.):  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
(7-7/16" × 2-5/16" × 7/16")  
Mass (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your  
telephone directory for the nearest car audio  
speciality shop.  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
USA ONLY  
Call 1-800-252-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
We can help you!  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-AR770/KD-G720  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual de instalación/conexión  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
GET0354-002A  
[J]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser  
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con  
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant  
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce  
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous  
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
dealers.  
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para  
automóviles.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
ADVERTENCIAS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher  
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas  
antes de instalar la unidad.  
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements  
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis  
del automóvil después de la instalación.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de  
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
Notas:  
Remarques:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el  
fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario  
de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima  
de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia  
de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie  
“AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 16  
del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta  
aislante.  
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese  
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute  
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de  
plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une  
impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager  
vos enceintes (voir page 16 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont  
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum  
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire  
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Sumidero térmico  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la  
fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la  
connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon  
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait  
sérieusement endommagé.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation  
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían  
producirse graves daños en la unidad.  
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del  
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su  
automóvil.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún  
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.  
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose  
elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de  
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Estuche duro/Panel de control  
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande  
Sleeve  
Cubierta  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Placa de guarnición  
Plaque d’assemblage  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Cordón de alimentación  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Washer (ø5)  
Arandela (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")  
Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pulgada)  
Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pouces)  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
Cojín de goma  
Amortisseur en  
caoutchouc  
Handles  
Manijas  
Poignées  
Remote controller  
Control remoto  
Télécommade  
Battery  
Pila  
Pile  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL  
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE  
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna  
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult  
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si  
vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits  
pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para  
instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
by a qualified technician.  
• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,  
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le  
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage  
the fuse on the rear.  
Al poner la unidad vertical,  
tenga cuidado de no dañar  
el fusible provisto en la  
parte posterior.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
1
*
Lorsque vous mettez  
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para  
retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour  
maintenir le manchon en place.  
l’appareil à la verticale,  
faire attention de ne pas  
endommager le fusible situé  
sur l’arrière.  
Removing the unit  
Extracción de la unidad  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,  
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración  
para poder desmontar la unidad.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un  
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar  
la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon  
option  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Fire wall  
Tabique a prueba de incendios  
Cloison  
Stay (option)  
Soporte (opción)  
Hauban (en option)  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm  
2
*
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
(M5 × 3/8")*2  
2
2
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm  
(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm  
(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Dashboard  
Tablero de  
instrumentos  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Screw (option)  
Tornillo (opción)  
Vis (en option)  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm  
(M5 × 3/8")*2  
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm  
Pocket  
Compartimiento  
Poche  
(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm  
(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Note  
Nota  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de  
longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm  
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS  
• El fusible se quema.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• No es posible conectar la alimentación.  
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• No sale sonido de los altavoces.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• El sonido presenta distorsión.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
• Perturbación de ruido.  
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil  
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la  
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• Unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• La unidad se calienta.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
A
Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del  
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le  
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager  
sérieusement l’appareil.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.  
body may be different in color.  
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de  
de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.  
la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
specified in the illustration below.  
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el  
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre  
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.  
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
2 Conecte el cable de antena.  
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
Al subwoofer (véase diagrama  
)
)
LINE IN—Only for KD-AR770/sólo para KD-AR770/seulement pour le KD-AR770  
Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme  
)
(see diagram / véase el diagrama / voir le diagramme  
)
Antenna  
connector  
Conector de  
antena  
Connecteur  
d’antenne  
1
1
1
15 A fuse  
Fusible de 15 A  
Fusible 15 A  
*
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Ignition switch  
Interruptor de encendido  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Black  
Negro  
Noir  
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal de tierra  
posterior  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Borne arrière de masse  
Yellow*2  
Amarillo*2  
Jaune*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del  
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la  
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Line out (see diagram  
)
Salida de línea (véase diagrama  
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Red  
Rojo  
Rouge  
To external components (see diagram  
A los componentes externos (véase el diagrama  
Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme  
)
)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Fuse block  
Bloque de fusibles  
Porte-fusible  
)
Blue with white stripe  
Azul con rayas blancas  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
2
*
*
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation,  
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be  
turned on.  
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa  
a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo  
contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant  
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
Orange with white stripe  
Naranja con rayas blancas  
Orange avec bande blanche  
2
2
(200 mA max.)  
To car light control switch  
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil  
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture  
Brown  
Marrón  
Marrone  
To cellular phone system—only for KD-AR770  
Al sistema de teléfono celular—sólo para KD-AR770  
Al cellulare—seulement pour le KD-AR770  
White with black stripe  
Blanco con rayas negras  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanco  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris con rayas negras  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Verde con rayas negras  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Verde  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Púrpura con rayas negras  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Púrpura  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Altavoz derecho (frontal)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Altavoz derecho (trasero)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs  
extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave  
B
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo  
de su automóvil.  
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre  
système autoradio.  
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor  
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.  
Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al amplificador.  
Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad quedan sin usar.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il  
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
•
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
• For KD-AR770: The line output level of this unit is kept high to  
maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.  
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down  
the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best  
performance from this unit.  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les  
à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil  
inutilisés.  
• Para KD-AR770: El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece  
alto para que corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad  
reproducidos por esta unidad.  
• Pour le KD-AR770: Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est  
maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour  
les sons reproduits par cet appareil.  
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya  
el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un  
óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.  
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil,  
diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour  
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)  
Remote lead  
Cable remoto  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)  
Rear speakers  
Altavoces posteriores  
Enceintes arrière  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
3
*
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the  
car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint  
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un  
lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de  
fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.  
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la  
voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de  
peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut  
être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
Enceintes avant  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
Enceintes avant  
3
3
4
4
4
*
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this  
unit)  
Cable de señal (no suministrado  
con esta unidad)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec  
cet appareil)  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Connecting the external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs  
JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM,  
iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “CHANGER” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) /  
Réglez “CHANGER” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page16 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.  
• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP  
—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit.  
• The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface  
adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for  
D. player).  
Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur  
Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra  
en la ilustración de abajo.  
l’illustration.  
•
Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP JVC  
—Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet appareil.  
• Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link  
Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor.  
• Puede conectar el iPod*5 o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador  
de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500  
(para el reproductor D.).  
• Le iPod*5 ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un  
adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou  
KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
Prise du changeur CD  
or  
o
ou  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido  
separadamente)  
JVC DLP  
DLP JVC  
Processeur DLP JVC  
JVC CD changer  
Cambiador de CD de JVC  
Changeur de CD JVC  
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)  
TM  
• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC  
Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).  
• Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un  
adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).  
TM  
• Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect (vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur  
numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni).  
TM  
Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)  
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)  
TM  
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect  
)
To CD changer, KS-PD100,  
or KS-PD500  
Al cambiador de CD,  
KS-PD100 o KS-PD500  
Au changeur de CD,  
KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500  
TM  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box  
Sintonizador universal XMDirect™  
TM  
Tuner universel XMDirect  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
Prise du changeur CD  
or  
o
ou  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido  
separadamente)  
JVC DLP  
DLP JVC  
Processeur DLP JVC  
JVC CD changer  
Cambiador de CD de JVC  
Changeur de CD JVC  
or  
o
ou  
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)  
TM  
Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)  
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)  
TM  
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect  
)
TM  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box  
Sintonizador universal XMDirect™  
TM  
Tuner universel XMDirect  
CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:  
• Before connecting the external components,  
make sure that the unit is turned off.  
• Antes de conectar los componentes  
externos, asegúrese de que la unidad esté  
apagada.  
5
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple  
Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y  
otros países.  
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple  
Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et  
dans les autres pays.  
5
6
6
6
7
8
*
*
*
*
Connecting cord supplied with your  
JVC CD changer or DLP  
Conexión del cable suministrado para  
su cambiador de CD o DLP JVC  
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre  
changeur CD ou processeur DLP JVC  
*
*
*
Signal cord supplied with your  
Smart Digital Adapter  
Cable de señal suministrado con el  
adaptador Smart Digital  
Cordon de signal fourni avec votre  
adaptateur numérique intelligent  
*
Audio signal cord supplied with your  
Smart Digital Adapter  
Cable de señal de audio suministrado  
con el adaptador Smart Digital  
Cordon audio fourni avec votre  
adaptateur numérique intelligent  
7
7
8
*
5
*
8
• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,  
assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.  
*
JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “EXT IN” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez  
“EXT IN” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 16 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter,  
KS-U100K (not supplied).  
Stereo mini plug  
Miniclavija estéreo  
Fiche stéré mini  
To headphones jack  
Al jack para auriculares  
À la prise du casque d’écoute  
• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP.  
También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador  
para radio SIRIUS JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado).  
• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.  
Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de  
DC power plug  
Clavija de alimentación de CC  
Fiche d’alimentation CC  
To DC IN jack  
Al jack DC IN  
À la prise DC IN  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
radio SIRIUS JVC KS-U100K (non fourni).  
Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC.  
•
Prise du changeur CD  
Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil extérieur  
Only for KD-AR770/sólo para KD-AR770/seulement pour le KD-AR770  
External component  
Componente exterior  
Appareil extérieur  
External component  
Componente exterior  
Appareil extérieur  
External component  
Componente exterior  
Appareil extérieur  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
10  
10  
10  
9
9
9
*
*
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied  
for this unit)  
Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no  
suministrado con esta unidad)  
Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non  
fourni avec cet autoradio)  
*
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for  
this unit)  
Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no  
suministrado con esta unidad)  
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non  
fourni avec cet appareil)  
Prise du changeur CD  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm  
Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G725  
KD-G725  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
6
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0355-001A  
[U/UH]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to use the MODE button  
How to reset your unit  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
Warning:  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 18 – 21).  
Control panel ...................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
6
6
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
7
Press repeatedly.  
Disc/USB memory operations.............  
Playing a disc in the unit ......................................  
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................  
Playing from a USB memory .................................  
8
8
8
9
Press either  
one.  
Sound adjustments........................... 12  
General settings — PSM ................... 13  
Title assignment .............................. 15  
iPod®/D. player operations ............... 16  
Other external component operations... 18  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 25  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
Display window  
; Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
a Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
s Main display  
d Tr (track) indicator  
f LOUD (loudness) indicator  
g Source display / Volume level indicator  
h Playback mode / item indicators—  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 EQ (equalizer) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
j Track type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
k Playback source indicators*—  
CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected  
as the playback source.  
DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.  
l EQ (equalizer) indicator  
/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
(disc),  
(folder),  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r MO (monaural) button  
t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
y Number buttons  
u RPT (repeat) button  
i RND (random) button  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 13).  
o
4/¢  
buttons  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a  
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
Caution:  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page...  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Getting started  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
13 and 14.  
1
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
2
!
⁄
For FM/AM tuner  
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Adjust the volume.  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Volume level appears.  
Volume level indicator  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! on the left...  
1
3 Finish the procedure.  
To check the current clock  
time while the power is  
turned off  
To check other information  
while listening to the radio  
Clock = Station name*  
=Frequency =(back to the  
beginning)  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
* FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station,  
“NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a  
station, see page 15.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
~
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Ÿ
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with  
sufficient signal strength.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
2
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
1
2
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
~
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 14), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
or  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-  
compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
Ÿ
USB input terminal  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it  
out from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
Continued on the next page...  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA/USB) directly  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
1
2
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG ON” (see page 14)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]  
TRE*1 (treble)  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
[R06 to F06]  
BAL*3 (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
[L06 to R06]  
LOUD*1 (loudness)  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
+01  
–02  
+01  
00  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
(Classical music)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]  
HIP HOP  
1
(Funk or rap music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
JAZZ  
+03  
OFF  
(Jazz music)  
2
3
4
5
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer  
output.  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 14 for details.)  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.  
1
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [6].  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
1 – 12, [6]  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
00 – 59, [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the  
source, playback pauses during telephone muting.  
SCROLL*1  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
Continued on the next page...  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
WOOFER  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to  
the subwoofer.  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
EXT IN*2  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod  
External input  
or a JVC D. player, [16].  
: To use any other external component, [18].  
EXT IN  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing  
Tag display  
MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power  
of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from  
being damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
:
[Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo  
effect may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
1
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD or USB.  
2
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
Title assignment  
character position.  
You can assign titles to station frequencies and  
CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
Sources  
Maximum number of characters  
finish entering the title.  
Station  
frequencies  
Up to 8 characters (up to 30  
station frequencies including  
both FM and AM)  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Up to 32 characters (up to 30  
discs)  
CDs/CD-CH*  
*
You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an  
MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
1 Select the sources.  
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When you select “CD“ as the source  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for  
controlling an iPod.  
To pause*1 or  
stop*2 playback  
To resume  
playback, press it  
again.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next  
or previous tracks  
Caution:  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
1 Enter the main menu.  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 14.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
For iPod:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
!
Adjust the volume.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
7
Random play  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
ALBM RND*4  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play  
D. player.  
• Holding  
4 /¢  
can skip 10  
=
On” of the  
items at a time.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
–
5 seconds.  
–
4
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
*
For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
Selecting the playback modes  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
One” for the  
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
All” for the  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More about this unit  
Other external component  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
For listening to the the USB memory, see pages  
9 – 11; For iPod, or D.player, see pages 16 and  
17.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
~
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 14  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
Adjust the volume.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
To check other information while listening to  
an external component  
Inserting a disc  
Clock Ô EXT IN  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
Continued on the next page...  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
Ejecting a disc  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories or some files due to their  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30  
station frequencies or 30 discs, “NAMEFULL”  
appears. Delete unwanted titles before  
assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG-  
2.5)  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected  
to this unit, all operations from the iPod or  
D. player are disabled. Perform all operations  
from this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 13). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
Maintenance  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
How to handle discs  
Warped disc  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
Center holder  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
Stick-on label  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been  
formatted correctly. The files included in the  
USB memory are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy the MP3/WMA track again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page...  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 16).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Format:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminal: CD changer  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, TH  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G725  
Installation/Connection Manual  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
GET0355-006A  
[U/UH]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, TH  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
‰∑¬  
ENGLISH  
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡‰  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNINGS  
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß ¥‡°π°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)  
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√¥ (¥Àπ“ 14 §”·π–π”)  
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø  
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
ÿ:  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealers.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
•
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°  
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π  
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ
ÿ
D
A / B  
C
Trim plate  
Hard case/Control panel  
Sleeve  
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß  
≈ß∫√√®  
ÿ
ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß  
Washer (ø5)  
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
πÕµ≈Õ§(M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
≈°µ¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)  
I
R¬“ußb°bπe°r√c–u·s∑hi°on  
J
H§πa∫ndߧle∫s  
K
L
B·∫atµte‡µryÕ√  
Remote controller  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§  
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…  
• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.  
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥  
1
*
When you stand the unit, be  
careful not to damage the fuse  
on the rear.  
*1 ‡¡Õ§  
ÿ≥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢π √–«ßÕ¬“  
∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑  
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™  
ÿ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
„ §π∫ߧ∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ  
„À‡≈Õπ™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß  
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™  
ÿ
ÿ
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
ºπß°π‰ø  
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑  
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
*2 Not supplied for this unit.  
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
D·ºaßshÀbπo“aªr∑d¡  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Screw (option)  
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
P°–o‡cªk“e–t  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
• ø« ¢“¥  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π  
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“  
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ  
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause  
serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™  
ÿ
ÿ
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–  
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ  
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫  
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»  
ÿ
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3
ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π  
Antenna Connector  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
)
∑µÕ ”À√∫ “¬Õ“°“»  
™Õ߇ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß´∫«ø‡øÕ√ꢀ(¥·ºπ¿¡ )  
15 A fuse  
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Ignition switch  
«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥  
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
Rear ground terminal  
®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß  
Black  
¥”  
Line out (see diagram  
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ꢀ ꢀ)  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
To external components (see diagram  
)
™Õ߇ ¬∫µÕ¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ )  
Yellow *2  
‡À≈Õß*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ  
(‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)  
Fuse block  
Red  
·¥ß  
·ºßø«  
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
power cannot be turned on.  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«  
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß  
µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
Blue  
»ø“  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
)
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA  
Orange with white stripe  
¡·∂∫¢“«  
To car light control switch  
«µ´§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√  
Brown  
𔵓≈  
To cellular phone system  
µÕ°∫‚∑√»æ∑‡§≈Õπ∑  
White with black stripe  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
White  
¢“«·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“  
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”  
‡¢¬«  
¡«ß·∂∫¥”  
¡«ß  
¢“«  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / µÕ·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√·≈–/À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“ππÕ°  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
§
ÿ
ÿ≥¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ„π√∂¬πµ  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
°Õ∫π‰¥  
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰«  
Remote lead  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•  
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)  
µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡  
Rear speakers  
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
Subwoofer  
´∫«‡øÕ√  
Front speakers  
3
3
Front speakers  
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to  
the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the  
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂  
µ√ß «π∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ  
4
°ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π) À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥  
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
*4 “¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
C Connecting the external components / °“√µÕ‡æ¡‡µ¡‡¢“°∫Õ  
ÿª°√≥ÕπÊ  
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD ‡™π‡®Õ√, Apple iPod® À√Õ‡§√Õ߇≈π JVC D.  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
µß§“ “CHANGER” ‡ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 14 §”·π–π”)  
You can connect these components as illustrated below.  
The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
∑“π “¡“√∂µÕÕÿª°√≥¥ß°≈“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥“π≈“ß  
∑“π “¡“√∂‡™Õ¡µÕ iPod*5 À√Õ‡§√Õ߇≈π D. ‚¥¬„™Õπ‡∑Õ√‡ø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ (‰¡¡¡“„À)—KS-PD100 ( ”À√∫ iPod) À√Õ KS-PD500 ( ”À√∫‡§√Õ߇≈π D.)  
CAUTION / ¢Õ§«√√–«ß:  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.  
Apple iPod (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)  
• °Õπ®–‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫Õ  
ÿ
ÿ
or  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
À√Õ  
‡§√Õ߇≈π JVC D. (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)  
JVC CD changer  
JVC CD ‡™π‡®Õ√  
CD changer jack  
™Õ߇ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß  
‡§√Õ߇≈π CD  
6
5
5
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer  
*
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
*6 µÕ “¬∑„À¡“ ”À√∫ CD ‡™π‡®Õ√  
iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»ÕπÊ  
Other external component / Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°ÕπÊ  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
µß§“ “EXT IN” ‡∫ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 14 §”·π–π”)  
External component  
Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°  
CD changer jack  
™Õ߇ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß  
‡§√Õ߇≈π CD  
External component  
Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°  
7
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
*7 Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√ “¬ ≠≠“≥‡¢“ KS-U57 (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
¢«‡ ¬∫¡π ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡.  
8
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
*8 Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√√∫ ≠≠“≥ AUX √  
ÿπ KS-U58 (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G725  
KD-G725  
ALAT PENERIMA CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BUKU PETUNJUK  
GET0355-004A  
[UN]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to use the MODE button  
How to reset your unit  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
Warning:  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 18 – 21).  
Control panel ...................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
6
6
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
7
Press repeatedly.  
Disc/USB memory operations.............  
Playing a disc in the unit ......................................  
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................  
Playing from a USB memory .................................  
8
8
8
9
Press either  
one.  
Sound adjustments........................... 12  
General settings — PSM ................... 13  
Title assignment .............................. 15  
iPod®/D. player operations ............... 16  
Other external component operations... 18  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 25  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
Display window  
; Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
a Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
s Main display  
d Tr (track) indicator  
f LOUD (loudness) indicator  
g Source display / Volume level indicator  
h Playback mode / item indicators—  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 EQ (equalizer) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
j Track type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
k Playback source indicators*—  
CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected  
as the playback source.  
DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.  
l EQ (equalizer) indicator  
/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
(disc),  
(folder),  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r MO (monaural) button  
t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
y Number buttons  
u RPT (repeat) button  
i RND (random) button  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 13).  
o
4/¢  
buttons  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a  
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
Caution:  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page...  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Getting started  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
13 and 14.  
1
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
2
!
⁄
For FM/AM tuner  
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Adjust the volume.  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Volume level appears.  
Volume level indicator  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! on the left...  
1
3 Finish the procedure.  
To check the current clock  
time while the power is  
turned off  
To check other information  
while listening to the radio  
Clock = Station name*  
=Frequency =(back to the  
beginning)  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
* FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station,  
“NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a  
station, see page 15.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
~
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Ÿ
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with  
sufficient signal strength.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
2
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
1
2
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
~
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 14), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
or  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-  
compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
Ÿ
USB input terminal  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it  
out from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
Continued on the next page...  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA/USB) directly  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
1
2
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG ON” (see page 14)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]  
TRE*1 (treble)  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
[R06 to F06]  
BAL*3 (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
[L06 to R06]  
LOUD*1 (loudness)  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
+01  
–02  
+01  
00  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
(Classical music)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]  
HIP HOP  
1
(Funk or rap music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
JAZZ  
+03  
OFF  
(Jazz music)  
2
3
4
5
*
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer  
output.  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 14 for details.)  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.  
1
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [6].  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
1 – 12, [6]  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
00 – 59, [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the  
source, playback pauses during telephone muting.  
SCROLL*1  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
Continued on the next page...  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
WOOFER  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to  
the subwoofer.  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
EXT IN*2  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod  
External input  
or a JVC D. player, [16].  
: To use any other external component, [18].  
EXT IN  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing  
Tag display  
MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power  
of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from  
being damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
:
[Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo  
effect may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
1
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD or USB.  
2
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
Title assignment  
character position.  
You can assign titles to station frequencies and  
CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
Sources  
Maximum number of characters  
finish entering the title.  
Station  
frequencies  
Up to 8 characters (up to 30  
station frequencies including  
both FM and AM)  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Up to 32 characters (up to 30  
discs)  
CDs/CD-CH*  
*
You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an  
MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
1 Select the sources.  
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When you select “CD“ as the source  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for  
controlling an iPod.  
To pause*1 or  
stop*2 playback  
To resume  
playback, press it  
again.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next  
or previous tracks  
Caution:  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
1 Enter the main menu.  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 14.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
For iPod:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
!
Adjust the volume.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
7
Random play  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
ALBM RND*4  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play  
D. player.  
• Holding  
4 /¢  
can skip 10  
=
On” of the  
items at a time.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
–
5 seconds.  
–
4
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
*
For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
Selecting the playback modes  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
One” for the  
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
All” for the  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More about this unit  
Other external component  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
For listening to the the USB memory, see pages  
9 – 11; For iPod, or D.player, see pages 16 and  
17.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
~
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 14  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
Adjust the volume.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
To check other information while listening to  
an external component  
Inserting a disc  
Clock Ô EXT IN  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
Continued on the next page...  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
Ejecting a disc  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories or some files due to their  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30  
station frequencies or 30 discs, “NAMEFULL”  
appears. Delete unwanted titles before  
assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG-  
2.5)  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected  
to this unit, all operations from the iPod or  
D. player are disabled. Perform all operations  
from this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 13). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
Maintenance  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
How to handle discs  
Warped disc  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
Center holder  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
Stick-on label  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been  
formatted correctly. The files included in the  
USB memory are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy the MP3/WMA track again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page...  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 16).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Format:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminal: CD changer  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G725  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
GET0355-009A  
[UN]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli  
di dealer audio mobil JVC.  
WARNINGS  
PERINGATAN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Notes:  
Catatan:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
dealers.  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang dari  
50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker dari  
kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan alat penerima ini.  
Heat sink  
Pendingin  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada item yang hilang, segera hubungi  
dealer audio mobil JVC anda.  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol  
C
D
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Kabel power  
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat  
sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)  
I
K
L
J
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
Handles  
Pegangan  
-pegangan  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan  
teknisi yang berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan  
listrik yang diperlukan.  
1
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage the  
fuse on the rear.  
Ketika anda memberdirikan  
alat penerima, hati-hati  
untuk tidak merusak sekring  
di belakang.  
1
*
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang  
tepat untuk menahan selongsong  
secara kuat pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan alat penerima  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik alat  
penerima seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga  
alat penerima dapat dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima  
tanpa menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
penguat tambahan  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.  
2
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada  
bagian depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-skerup panjang–  
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang dari  
30˚.  
Catatan  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• Sekring meledak.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek  
dan tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause  
serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang  
tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
Ke subwoofer (lihat diagram  
)
)
Antenna connector  
Konektor antena  
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima.  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
1
Rear ground  
terminal  
Terminal tanah  
belakang  
Line out (see diagram  
Keluaran (lihat diagram  
)
Black  
Hitam  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
To external components (see diagram  
)
Ke komponen luar (lihat diagram  
)
Yellow*2  
Kuning*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
2
2
*
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini  
sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,  
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
Orange with white stripe  
Oranye dengan strip putih  
To car light control switch  
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil  
Brown  
Coklat  
To cellular phone system  
Ke sistem telepon selular  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
White  
Putih  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip  
hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black  
stripe  
Hijau dengan strip  
hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.  
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)  
Remote lead  
Ujung jauh  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
Rear speakers  
Speaker-speaker  
belakang  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
JVC Amplifier  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Penguat JVC  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker  
depan  
3
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to  
the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the  
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis  
dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi  
cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan  
melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat  
penerima tersebut.  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
3
4
4
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat  
penerima ini)  
C Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal  
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod® atau JVC D. player  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “CHANGER” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
You can connect these components as illustrated below.  
The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah.  
iPod*5 atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)—KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).  
CAUTION / PERINGATAN:  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)  
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.  
• Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.  
or  
atau  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)  
JVC CD changer  
CD changer JVC  
CD changer jack  
Konektor CD changer  
5
6
6
*
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di  
negara-negara lain.  
*
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer  
Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer  
anda  
5
Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “EXT IN” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
External component  
Komponen eksternal  
CD changer jack  
Konektor CD changer  
External component  
Komponen eksternal  
7
7
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
Adapter Input Saluran KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk  
alat penerima ini)  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm  
8
8
*
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
Adapter Input AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk alat  
penerima ini)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G724  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0356-001A  
[UI]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to use the MODE button  
How to reset your unit  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
Warning:  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 18 – 21).  
Control panel ...................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
6
6
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
7
Press repeatedly.  
Disc/USB memory operations.............  
Playing a disc in the unit ......................................  
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................  
Playing from a USB memory .................................  
8
8
8
9
Press either  
one.  
Sound adjustments........................... 12  
General settings — PSM ................... 13  
Title assignment .............................. 15  
iPod®/D. player operations ............... 16  
Other external component operations... 18  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 25  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
Display window  
; Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
a Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
s Main display  
d Tr (track) indicator  
f LOUD (loudness) indicator  
g Source display / Volume level indicator  
h Playback mode / item indicators—  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 EQ (equalizer) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
j Track type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
k Playback source indicators*—  
CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected  
as the playback source.  
DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.  
l EQ (equalizer) indicator  
/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
(disc),  
(folder),  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r MO (monaural) button  
t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
y Number buttons  
u RPT (repeat) button  
i RND (random) button  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 13).  
o
4/¢  
buttons  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a  
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
Caution:  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page...  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Getting started  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
13 and 14.  
1
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
2
!
⁄
For FM/AM tuner  
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Adjust the volume.  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Volume level appears.  
Volume level indicator  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! on the left...  
1
3 Finish the procedure.  
To check the current clock  
time while the power is  
turned off  
To check other information  
while listening to the radio  
Clock = Station name*  
=Frequency =(back to the  
beginning)  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
* FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station,  
“NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a  
station, see page 15.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
~
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Ÿ
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with  
sufficient signal strength.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
2
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
1
2
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
~
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 14), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
or  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-  
compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
Ÿ
USB input terminal  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it  
out from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
Continued on the next page...  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA/USB) directly  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
1
2
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG ON” (see page 14)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to  
“TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]  
TRE*1 (treble)  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
[R06 to F06]  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
BAL (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
[L06 to R06]  
LOUD*1 (loudness)  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
+01  
–02  
+01  
00  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SUB.W*3 (subwoofer)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*4]  
HIP HOP  
1
(Funk or rap music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 14 for details.)  
JAZZ  
+03  
OFF  
(Jazz music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.  
1
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [6].  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
1 – 12, [6]  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
00 – 59, [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the  
source, playback pauses during telephone muting.  
SCROLL*1  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
Continued on the next page...  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
WOOFER  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to  
the subwoofer.  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
EXT IN*2  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod  
External input  
or a JVC D. player, [16].  
: To use any other external component, [18].  
EXT IN  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing  
Tag display  
MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power  
of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from  
being damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
:
[Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo  
effect may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
1
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD or USB.  
2
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
Title assignment  
character position.  
You can assign titles to station frequencies and  
CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
Sources  
Maximum number of characters  
finish entering the title.  
Station  
frequencies  
Up to 8 characters (up to 30  
station frequencies including  
both FM and AM)  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Up to 32 characters (up to 30  
discs)  
CDs/CD-CH*  
*
You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an  
MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
1 Select the sources.  
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When you select “CD“ as the source  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for  
controlling an iPod.  
To pause*1 or  
stop*2 playback  
To resume  
playback, press it  
again.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next  
or previous tracks  
Caution:  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
1 Enter the main menu.  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 14.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
For iPod:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
!
Adjust the volume.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
7
Random play  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
ALBM RND*4  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play  
D. player.  
• Holding  
4 /¢  
can skip 10  
=
On” of the  
items at a time.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
–
5 seconds.  
–
4
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
*
For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
Selecting the playback modes  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
One” for the  
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode  
D. player.  
=
All” for the  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other external component More about this unit  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
For listening to the the USB memory, see pages  
9 – 11; For iPod, or D.player, see pages 16 and  
17.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
~
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 14  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
Adjust the volume.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 12.)  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3 and WMA formats.  
To check other information while listening to  
an external component  
Inserting a disc  
Clock Ô EXT IN  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36)characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
Continued on the next page...  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
Ejecting a disc  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories or some files due to their  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30  
station frequencies or 30 discs, “NAMEFULL”  
appears. Delete unwanted titles before  
assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 - 8 kHz, (MPEG-2.5)  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected  
to this unit, all operations from the iPod or  
D. player are disabled. Perform all operations  
from this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 13). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
Maintenance  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
How to handle discs  
Warped disc  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
Center holder  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
Stick-on label  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been  
formatted correctly. The files included in the  
USB memory are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy the MP3/WMA track again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page...  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 16).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Format:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminal: CD changer  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G724  
Installation/Connection Manual  
GET0356-002A  
[UI]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealers.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with  
insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
1
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage the  
fuse on the rear.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer immediately.  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly in  
place.  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
C
D
Removing the unit  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Washer (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
L
J
I
K
Battery  
Handles  
Rubber cushion  
Remote controller  
When using the optional stay  
When installing the unit without  
using the sleeve  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio  
and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
*2 Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws  
(M5 × 8 mm)*2  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
Dashboard  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Bracket*2  
Screw (option)  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Pocket  
Flat type screws  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
(M5 × 8 mm)*2  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
Bracket*2  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting  
bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long  
screws. If longer screws are used, they could  
damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an  
angle of less than  
30˚.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
A Typical connections  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
)
Antenna connector  
15 A fuse  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Ignition switch  
Rear ground terminal  
Black  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Line out (see diagram  
)
Yellow *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car  
battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
To external components (see diagram  
)
Fuse block  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA  
max.)  
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
power cannot be turned on.  
Blue with white stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Orange with white stripe  
Brown  
To car light control switch  
To cellular phone system  
White with black stripe  
White  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Remote lead  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
You can connect amplifiers to  
upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue  
with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so  
that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Rear speakers  
3
*
Firmly attach the ground  
wire to the metallic  
JVC Amplifier  
body or to the chassis  
of the car—to the place  
uncoated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching  
the wire). Failure to do so  
may cause damage to the  
unit.  
JVC Amplifier  
•
Disconnect the speakers from  
this unit, connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Subwoofer  
Front speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Front speakers  
4
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
C Connecting the external components  
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*5 or D. player  
can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for  
iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
Apple iPod  
(separately purchased)  
CAUTION:  
• Before connecting the external components,  
make sure that the unit is turned off.  
or  
JVC D. player  
(separately purchased)  
5
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
JVC CD changer  
6
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer  
CD changer jack  
Other external component  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
External  
component  
CD changer jack  
External  
component  
7
8
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
CD RECEIVER  
RECEPTEUR CD  
KD-G722/KD-G721  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 7.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0357-003A  
[EX/EU]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
How to use the MODE button  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and  
European countries  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card  
is provided with this unit, and the same ID  
number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.  
Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the  
authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 22 – 25).  
Control panel  
—
KD-G722 and KD-G721 .........  
4
5
Remote controller — RM-RK50...............  
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
7
7
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
8
Press repeatedly.  
FM RDS operations............................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
9
9
Press either  
one.  
Disc/USB memory operations............. 11  
Playing a disc in the unit ....................................... 11  
Playing discs in the CD changer............................. 11  
Playing from a USB memory ................................. 12  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Sound adjustments........................... 15  
General settings — PSM ................... 16  
Title assignment............................... 18  
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 19  
Other external component operations ..... 20  
DAB tuner operations........................ 21  
More about this unit ......................... 22  
Maintenance .................................... 25  
Troubleshooting............................... 26  
Specifications................................... 29  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G722 and KD-G721  
Parts identification  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r EQ (equalizer) button  
t MO (monaural) button  
y SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)  
button  
u Number buttons  
i RPT (repeat) button  
o RND (random) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
;
4/¢  
buttons  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display window  
a Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
l Tracks type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
/ Playback source indicators*—CH (CD  
changer), DISC (built-in CD player)  
z EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
s Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
d RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG  
f Main display  
g Tr (track) indicator  
x Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
h LOUD (loudness) indicator  
j Source display / Volume level indicator  
k Playback mode / item indicators—  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 17).  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
(disc),  
(folder),  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Caution:  
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume) for connection.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
Continued on the next page  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod or a  
®
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations (or services) if  
pressed briefly.  
Main elements and features  
• Searches for ensembles if pressed and  
held.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is  
on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with  
5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations (or services)  
with D ∞.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
16 – 18.  
1
2
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
!
⁄
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
For FM/AM tuner  
For DAB tuner  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
Adjust the volume.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level indicator  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
FM RDS operations  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations  
to send an additional signal along with their  
regular programme signals.  
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
2
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the  
following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY  
Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)  
• Programme Search (see page 17)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
3
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your  
favorite programme by searching for a PTY  
code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see  
page 10.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
~
Ÿ
The last selected PTY  
code appears.  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
Select one of your favorite  
programme types.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 11.  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 10).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
!
Start searching for your favorite  
programme.  
If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code as you  
have selected, that station is tuned in.  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)  
from any source other than AM.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume  
level if the current level is lower than the preset  
level (see page 17).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme)  
indicator either lights up or  
flashes.  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby  
Reception is activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs  
when you are listening to an FM station  
without the RDS signals required for TA  
Standby Reception.)  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals. The  
TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.  
1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to  
switch temporarily to your favorite PTY  
programme from any source other than AM.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code  
for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby  
Reception is activated.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other  
PTY codes into other preset numbers.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby  
Reception is not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in  
to another station providing these signals. The  
PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain  
lit.  
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,  
select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16).  
The PTY indicator goes off.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception  
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the  
same network, possibly broadcasting the same  
programme with stronger signals (see the  
illustration below).  
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-  
Tracking Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.  
~
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 17), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency =  
Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
USB input terminal  
Ÿ
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out  
from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly  
2
3
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or a  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 18)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
1
2
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]  
Adjust the volume.  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
–02  
+01  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
1
(Classical music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 18 for details.)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+03  
OFF  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes  
as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)  
items listed in the table that follows.  
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [7].  
Display demonstration  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
0 – 23 (1 – 12), [7]  
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59, [7]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
12H O 24H, [7]  
[Initial: 24H]  
CLK ADJ  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted  
using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.  
: Cancels.  
When the received signals from the current FM RDS station become  
weak...  
AF-REG  
Alternative frequency/  
AF  
: [Initial]; Switches to another station (the programme  
may differ from the one currently received), [11].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
regionalization  
reception  
AF REG  
OFF  
: Switches to another station broadcasting the same  
programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “AF ON”).  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [10].  
OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [10] = (back to the beginning)  
PTY-STBY  
PTY standby  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TA VOL  
[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*1, [10]  
Traffic announcement  
volume  
P-SEARCH  
ON  
: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another frequency  
Programme search  
broadcasting the same programme as the original  
preset RDS station is if the preset station signals are not  
sufficient.  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
DAB AF*2  
Alternative frequency  
AF ON  
: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services  
and FM RDS stations, [11, 22].  
: Cancels.  
reception  
AF OFF  
DAB VOL*2  
You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB tuner  
to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.  
[Initial: VOL 00]  
DAB volume  
adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
SCROLL*3  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
Scroll  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
WOOFER  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
EXT IN*4  
External input  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [11], an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player, [19].  
EXT IN  
: To use any other external component than the above,  
[20].  
1
2
3
4
*
*
*
*
Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18).  
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, or USB.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/  
WMA tracks, [14].  
Tag display  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of  
the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being  
damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect  
may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit  
and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30  
discs and each title up to 32 characters.  
• You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an  
MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
character position.  
1 Select the sources.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
finish entering the title.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
Ex.: When “CD“ is selected as the source  
Available characters  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
To pause*1 or stop*2  
playback  
To resume playback,  
press it again.  
• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for  
®
controlling an iPod.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next or  
previous tracks  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Caution:  
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 17.  
1 Enter the main menu.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4/¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about  
5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a  
track.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
!
Adjust the volume.  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
7
Random play  
ALBM RND*  
For iPod:  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play = On” of the D.  
player.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
* For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
• Holding  
4/¢  
can skip 10  
items at a time.  
Other external component  
operations  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
For listening to the USB memory, see pages  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode = One” for the  
D. player.  
12 – 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 – 20.  
~
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the  
iPod or “Repeat Mode = All” for the D.  
player.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 17  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
~
Adjust the volume.  
Ÿ
!
Start searching for an ensemble.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
When an ensemble is received, searching  
stops.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an external component  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
EXT IN Ô Clock  
⁄
Select a service (either primary or  
secondary) to listen to.  
DAB tuner operations  
What is DAB system?  
To tune in to an ensemble manually  
Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !  
above...  
1
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can  
deliver digital quality sound without any  
annoying interference and signal distortion.  
Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and  
data. When transmitting, DAB combines  
several programmes (called “services”) to form  
one “ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—  
called “primary service”—can also be divided  
into its components (called “secondary  
service”). A typical ensemble has six or more  
programmes (services) broadcast at the same  
time.  
2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.  
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do  
the following:  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see  
“DAB AF” on page 17).  
Storing DAB services in memory  
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for  
each band.  
It is recommended to use DAB tuner  
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have  
another DAB tuner, consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for  
your DAB tuner.  
1 Select a service you want (see above).  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When shipped from the factory, Alternative  
Frequency Reception is activated.  
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency  
Reception, see page 17.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
To change the display information while  
tuning to an ensemble  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Service name = Ensemble name = Channel  
number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Tuning in to a preset DAB service  
1
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
2 Select the preset DAB service  
Turning on the power  
(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
If the selected primary service has some  
secondary services, pressing the same  
button again will tune in to the secondary  
services.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
Tracing the same programme—  
Alternative Frequency Reception  
–All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
You can keep listening to the same programme  
by activating the Alternative Frequency  
Reception.  
–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
–When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
• While receiving a DAB service:  
When driving in an area where a service  
cannot be received, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS  
station, broadcasting the same programme.  
• While receiving an FM RDS station:  
When driving in an area where a DAB service  
is broadcasting the same programme as the  
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM RDS operations  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires  
two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme  
Identification) and AF (Alternative  
Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-  
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by  
TA Standby Reception, the volume level  
automatically changes to the preset level (TA  
VOL) if the current level is lower than the  
preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception  
is activated (with AF selected), Network-  
Tracking Reception is also activated  
automatically. On the other hand, Network-  
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 16.)  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
«http://www.rds.org.uk».  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3, and WMA formats.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
Inserting a disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Changing the source  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
DAB tuner operations  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted  
even when you store a secondary service.  
• A previously preset DAB service is erased  
when a new DAB service is stored in the same  
preset number.  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs,  
“NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all  
operations from the iPod or D. player are  
disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Center holder  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
Continued on the next page  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
To play new discs  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Sticker  
Stick-on label  
Sticker residue  
Warped disc  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 13).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted  
correctly. The files included in the USB memory  
are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 19).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and  
reset the unit (see page 2).  
• “ANTENANG” appears on the  
display.  
Check the cords and connections.  
• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly  
and reset the unit (see page 2).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Format:  
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminals:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
CD changer, Steering wheel remote input  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
[MW Tuner]  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
[LW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 μV  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de  
fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
EN, FR  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G722/KD-G721  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
GET0357-010A  
[EX/EU]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, FR  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.  
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez  
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la  
voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR Remarques:  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière  
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 18 du  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande  
isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet  
appareil.  
Heat sink  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,  
will be seriously damaged.  
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des  
enceintes de votre voiture.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur  
autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui de transport/Panneau  
de commande  
Sleeve  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Plaque d’assemblage  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Washer (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)  
I
K
L
J
Rubber cushion  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Remote controller  
Télécommade  
Battery  
Pile  
Handles  
Poignées  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
kits.  
d’approvisionnement.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien  
qualifié.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
1
*
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage the  
fuse on the rear.  
1
Lorsque vous mettez  
l’appareil à la verticale,  
faire attention de ne pas  
endommager le fusible situé  
sur l’arrière.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées  
pour maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la  
façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du  
hauban en option  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil  
scans utiliser de manchon  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Fire wall  
Cloison  
Stay (option)  
Hauban (en option)  
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
2
Dashboard  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Screw (option)  
Vis (en option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.  
Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée  
d’un connecteur ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel  
(Vauxhall)  
A
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.  
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.  
Original wiring / Câblage original  
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1  
From the car body  
De la carrosserie de la  
voiture  
ISO connector  
Connecteur ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation  
fourni  
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2  
Y: Yellow  
R: Red  
Rouge  
Jaune  
View from the lead side  
Vue à partir du côté des fils  
B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en  
couleur.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.  
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme  
)
Aerial connector  
Connecteur d’antenne  
)
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram  
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
15 A fuse  
Fusible 15 A  
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Ignition switch  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Rear ground terminal  
Borne arrière de masse  
Black  
Noir  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Line out (see diagram  
Sortie de ligne  
)
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
(voir le diagramme  
)
Yellow *2  
Jaune *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture  
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
To external components (see diagram  
Au appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Red  
Rouge  
Fuse block  
Porte-fusible  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
2
2
*
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
power cannot be turned on.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant  
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne  
peut pas être mis sous tension.  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
(200 mA max.)  
Orange with white stripe  
Orange avec bande blanche  
To car light control switch  
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture  
Brown  
Marron  
To cellular phone system  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
White with black stripe  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système stéréo.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de  
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
•
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils  
this unit unused.  
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
Remote lead  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Subwoofer  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Caisson de  
3
grave  
*
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the  
metallic body or to the chassis of the  
car—to the place not coated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before  
attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse  
au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un  
endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture  
(s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord  
la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil  
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait  
correctement.  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
3
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Front speakers  
Enceintes avant  
Front speakers (see diagram  
)
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme  
)
5
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s  
ISO connector and connect them to the  
amplifier.  
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière  
du connecteur ISO de la voiture et  
connectez-les à l’amplificateur.  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
4
4
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet  
autoradio)  
5
*
D Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs  
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod‚ Apple® ou lecteur D. JVC  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) Choisissez “CHANGER” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 17 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration. Le iPod*6 ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou KS-PD500  
(pour le lecteur D.).  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)  
or  
ou  
CAUTION / PRECAUTION:  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)  
• Before connecting the external  
components, make sure that the unit  
is turned off.  
JVC CD changer  
JVC DAB tuner  
Changeur CD JVC  
Tuner DAB JVC  
• Avant de connecter les appareils  
extérieurs, assurez-vous que  
l’appareil est hors tension.  
CD changer jack  
Prise du changeur de CD  
6
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)  
*
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,  
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
iPod est une marque de commerce  
d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux  
États-Unis et dans les autres pays.  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
6
or  
ou  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)  
7
7
*
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD  
changer or DAB tuner  
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre  
changeur CD ou tuner DAB  
or  
ou  
JVC CD changer  
Changeur CD JVC  
JVC DAB tuner  
Tuner DAB JVC  
CD changer jack  
Prise du changeur de CD  
Other external component / Autre appareil extérieur  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
Choisissez “EXT IN” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 17 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
External component  
Appareil extérieur  
External component  
Appareil extérieur  
CD changer jack  
Prise du changeur de CD  
8
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
8
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm  
9
9
*
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant  
E
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller.  
To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
Steering wheel remote input  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la  
télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant à votre  
voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
KD-G722/KD-G721  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.  
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 7.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 7.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
GET0357-006A  
[EY]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
How to use the MODE button  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card  
is provided with this unit, and the same ID  
number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.  
Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the  
authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 22 – 25).  
Control panel  
—
KD-G722 and KD-G721 .........  
4
5
Remote controller — RM-RK50...............  
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
7
7
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
8
Press repeatedly.  
FM RDS operations............................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
9
9
Press either  
one.  
Disc/USB memory operations............. 11  
Playing a disc in the unit ....................................... 11  
Playing discs in the CD changer............................. 11  
Playing from a USB memory ................................. 12  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Sound adjustments........................... 15  
General settings — PSM ................... 16  
Title assignment............................... 18  
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 19  
Other external component operations ..... 20  
DAB tuner operations........................ 21  
More about this unit ......................... 22  
Maintenance .................................... 25  
Troubleshooting............................... 26  
Specifications................................... 29  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G722 and KD-G721  
Parts identification  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r EQ (equalizer) button  
t MO (monaural) button  
y SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)  
button  
u Number buttons  
i RPT (repeat) button  
o RND (random) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
;
4/¢  
buttons  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display window  
a Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
l Tracks type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
/ Playback source indicators*—CH (CD  
changer), DISC (built-in CD player)  
z EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
s Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
d RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG  
f Main display  
g Tr (track) indicator  
x Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
h LOUD (loudness) indicator  
j Source display / Volume level indicator  
k Playback mode / item indicators—  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 17).  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
(disc),  
(folder),  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Caution:  
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume) for connection.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
Continued on the next page  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod or a  
®
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations (or services) if  
pressed briefly.  
Main elements and features  
• Searches for ensembles if pressed and  
held.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is  
on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with  
5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations (or services)  
with D ∞.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
16 – 18.  
1
2
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
!
⁄
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
For FM/AM tuner  
For DAB tuner  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
Adjust the volume.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level indicator  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
FM RDS operations  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations  
to send an additional signal along with their  
regular programme signals.  
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
2
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the  
following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY  
Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)  
• Programme Search (see page 17)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
3
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your  
favorite programme by searching for a PTY  
code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see  
page 10.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
~
Ÿ
The last selected PTY  
code appears.  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
Select one of your favorite  
programme types.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 11.  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 10).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
!
Start searching for your favorite  
programme.  
If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code as you  
have selected, that station is tuned in.  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)  
from any source other than AM.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume  
level if the current level is lower than the preset  
level (see page 17).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme)  
indicator either lights up or  
flashes.  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby  
Reception is activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs  
when you are listening to an FM station  
without the RDS signals required for TA  
Standby Reception.)  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals. The  
TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.  
1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to  
switch temporarily to your favorite PTY  
programme from any source other than AM.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code  
for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby  
Reception is activated.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other  
PTY codes into other preset numbers.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby  
Reception is not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in  
to another station providing these signals. The  
PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain  
lit.  
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,  
select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16).  
The PTY indicator goes off.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception  
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the  
same network, possibly broadcasting the same  
programme with stronger signals (see the  
illustration below).  
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-  
Tracking Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.  
~
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 17), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency =  
Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
USB input terminal  
Ÿ
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out  
from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly  
2
3
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or a  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 18)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
1
2
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]  
Adjust the volume.  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
–02  
+01  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
1
(Classical music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 18 for details.)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+03  
OFF  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes  
as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)  
items listed in the table that follows.  
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [7].  
Display demonstration  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
0 – 23 (1 – 12), [7]  
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59, [7]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
12H O 24H, [7]  
[Initial: 24H]  
CLK ADJ  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted  
using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.  
: Cancels.  
When the received signals from the current FM RDS station become  
weak...  
AF-REG  
Alternative frequency/  
AF  
: [Initial]; Switches to another station (the programme  
may differ from the one currently received), [11].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
regionalization  
reception  
AF REG  
OFF  
: Switches to another station broadcasting the same  
programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “AF ON”).  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [10].  
OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [10] = (back to the beginning)  
PTY-STBY  
PTY standby  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TA VOL  
[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*1, [10]  
Traffic announcement  
volume  
P-SEARCH  
ON  
: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another frequency  
Programme search  
broadcasting the same programme as the original  
preset RDS station is if the preset station signals are not  
sufficient.  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
DAB AF*2  
Alternative frequency  
AF ON  
: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services  
and FM RDS stations, [11, 22].  
: Cancels.  
reception  
AF OFF  
DAB VOL*2  
You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB tuner  
to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.  
[Initial: VOL 00]  
DAB volume  
adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
SCROLL*3  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
Scroll  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
WOOFER  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
EXT IN*4  
External input  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [11], an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player, [19].  
EXT IN  
: To use any other external component than the above,  
[20].  
1
2
3
4
*
*
*
*
Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18).  
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, or USB.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/  
WMA tracks, [14].  
Tag display  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of  
the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being  
damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect  
may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit  
and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30  
discs and each title up to 32 characters.  
• You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an  
MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
character position.  
1 Select the sources.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
finish entering the title.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on the left...  
Ex.: When “CD“ is selected as the source  
Available characters  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
To pause*1 or stop*2  
playback  
To resume playback,  
press it again.  
• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for  
®
controlling an iPod.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next or  
previous tracks  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
2
Caution:  
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Preparations:  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 17.  
1 Enter the main menu.  
~
Ÿ
Now the 5/∞/ 4/¢  
buttons  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about  
5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a  
track.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
!
Adjust the volume.  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
7
Random play  
ALBM RND*  
For iPod:  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
SONG RND/RND ON  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play = On” of the D.  
player.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
* For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
menu, press 5.  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
• Holding  
4/¢  
can skip 10  
items at a time.  
Other external component  
operations  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
ONE RPT  
For listening to the USB memory, see pages  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode = One” for the  
D. player.  
12 – 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 – 20.  
~
ALL RPT  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the  
iPod or “Repeat Mode = All” for the D.  
player.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 17  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
~
Adjust the volume.  
Ÿ
!
Start searching for an ensemble.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
When an ensemble is received, searching  
stops.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an external component  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
EXT IN Ô Clock  
⁄
Select a service (either primary or  
secondary) to listen to.  
DAB tuner operations  
What is DAB system?  
To tune in to an ensemble manually  
Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !  
above...  
1
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can  
deliver digital quality sound without any  
annoying interference and signal distortion.  
Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and  
data. When transmitting, DAB combines  
several programmes (called “services”) to form  
one “ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—  
called “primary service”—can also be divided  
into its components (called “secondary  
service”). A typical ensemble has six or more  
programmes (services) broadcast at the same  
time.  
2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.  
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do  
the following:  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see  
“DAB AF” on page 17).  
Storing DAB services in memory  
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for  
each band.  
It is recommended to use DAB tuner  
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have  
another DAB tuner, consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for  
your DAB tuner.  
1 Select a service you want (see above).  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When shipped from the factory, Alternative  
Frequency Reception is activated.  
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency  
Reception, see page 17.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
To change the display information while  
tuning to an ensemble  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Service name = Ensemble name = Channel  
number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Tuning in to a preset DAB service  
1
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
2 Select the preset DAB service  
Turning on the power  
(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
If the selected primary service has some  
secondary services, pressing the same  
button again will tune in to the secondary  
services.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
Tracing the same programme—  
Alternative Frequency Reception  
–All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
You can keep listening to the same programme  
by activating the Alternative Frequency  
Reception.  
–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
–When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
• While receiving a DAB service:  
When driving in an area where a service  
cannot be received, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS  
station, broadcasting the same programme.  
• While receiving an FM RDS station:  
When driving in an area where a DAB service  
is broadcasting the same programme as the  
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM RDS operations  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires  
two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme  
Identification) and AF (Alternative  
Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-  
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by  
TA Standby Reception, the volume level  
automatically changes to the preset level (TA  
VOL) if the current level is lower than the  
preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception  
is activated (with AF selected), Network-  
Tracking Reception is also activated  
automatically. On the other hand, Network-  
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 16.)  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
«http://www.rds.org.uk».  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3, and WMA formats.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
Inserting a disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Changing the source  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
DAB tuner operations  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted  
even when you store a secondary service.  
• A previously preset DAB service is erased  
when a new DAB service is stored in the same  
preset number.  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs,  
“NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all  
operations from the iPod or D. player are  
disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Center holder  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
Continued on the next page  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
To play new discs  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Sticker  
Stick-on label  
Sticker residue  
Warped disc  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 13).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted  
correctly. The files included in the USB memory  
are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 19).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and  
reset the unit (see page 2).  
• “ANTENANG” appears on the  
display.  
Check the cords and connections.  
• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly  
and reset the unit (see page 2).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Maximum Power Output:  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Format:  
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminals:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
CD changer, Steering wheel remote input  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
[MW Tuner]  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
[LW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 μV  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства  
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу  
EN, GE, RU  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G722/KD-G721  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
GET0357-013A  
[EY]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В  
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш  
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор  
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем  
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и  
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное  
устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
WARNINGS  
WARNUNGEN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse  
installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des  
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
Примечания:  
Notes:  
Hinweise:  
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем  
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной  
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели  
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если  
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в  
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum  
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.  
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit  
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung  
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um  
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 18 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте  
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.  
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.  
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen  
der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband  
umwickeln.  
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau  
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Радиатор  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen  
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и  
подключению громкоговорителей:  
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к  
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей  
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему  
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer  
beschädigt wird.  
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des  
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die  
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Список деталей для установки и подключения  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-  
Autoradiohändler.  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с  
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
C
D
A / B  
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Муфта  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Декоративную панель  
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui/Schalttafel  
Жесткий футляр/панель управления  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Кабель питания  
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Резиновый чехол  
Handles  
Griffe  
Рычаги  
Remote controller  
Fernbedienung  
диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния  
Battery  
Batterie  
Бaтapeйкa  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have  
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed vertreibt.  
by a qualified technician.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei  
irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich  
des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze  
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.  
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,  
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста  
JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие  
принадлежности.  
• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это  
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen. устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen  
Anschlüsse vor.  
Выполните необходимые подключения  
контактов, как показано на оборотной  
стороне этой инструкции.  
1
1
*
When you stand the unit, be  
careful not to damage the fuse  
on the rear.  
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts  
darauf achten, daß die  
*
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Sicherung auf der Rückseite  
nicht beschädigt wird.  
Устанавливайте устройство  
таким образом, чтобы не  
повредить предохранитель,  
расположенный сзади.  
1
*
Removing the unit  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Удаление устройства  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so  
that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie in  
der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt werden  
kann.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как  
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden  
der Anker-Option / При использовании  
дополнительной стойки  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Gerät an seiner Stelle.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
Anker (Option)  
Feuerwand  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Стойка  
Стена  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
(дополнительно)  
2
*
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
Hе входит в комплект поставки.  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
2
2
Bracket*2  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Приборная панель  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Schraube (Option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Pocket  
Taschen  
Карман  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von  
weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Hinweis  
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden  
längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
FEHLERSUCHE  
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
• The fuse blows.  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• Питание не включается.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
• Ton verzerrt.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an  
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?  
• Звук искажен.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси  
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem  
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-  
A
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO  
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /  
Исходная схема соединений  
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 1  
From the car body  
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie  
От корпуса автомобиля  
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
ISO-Steckverbinder  
Разъем ISO  
Use modified wiring  
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung  
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений  
2
if the unit does not turn on.  
wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.  
2
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
I
J
L
2.  
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
K
M
O
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 2  
N
P
Y: Yellow  
Gelb  
R: Red  
Rot  
View from the lead side  
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen  
Желтый  
Красный  
Вид со стороны выводов  
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования  
разъемов ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте  
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может  
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen.  
body may be different in color.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова  
können sich farblich unterscheiden.  
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
specified in the illustration below.  
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,  
2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в  
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
указанном ниже порядке.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
3 Подключите кабель антенны.  
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к  
устройству.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
An Subwoofer (siehe Schaltplan  
К низкочастотному динамику (см. схему  
)
Aerial connector  
Antennenanschluss  
Разъем антенны  
)
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram  
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan  
)
)
)
К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему  
)
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Предохранитель 15 A  
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
Не входит в комплект поставки.  
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Переключатель зажигания  
1
*
Rear ground terminal  
Hintere Erdungsc-  
anschlußklemme  
1
*
Black  
Schwarz  
Черный  
Задний разъем заземления  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Line out (see diagram  
Schutz kappen Signalausgang  
(siehe Schaltplan  
К выходу (см. схему  
)
)
Yellow*2  
Gelb*2  
)
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen  
an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
Желтый*2  
To external components (see diagram  
An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan  
К внешним устройствам (см. схему  
)
)
)
Red  
Rot  
Красный  
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Блок предохранителя  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
2
2
2
*
*
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation,  
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be  
turned on.  
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor  
dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst  
die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот  
провод, иначе питание не включится.  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Синий с белой полосой  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)  
Orange with white stripe  
Orange mit weißem Streifen  
Оранжевый с белой полосой  
To car light control switch  
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter  
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля  
Brown  
Braun  
Коричневый  
To cellular phone system  
An Mobiltelefonsystem  
К мобильной телефонной системе  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Белый с черной  
полосой  
White  
Weiß  
Белый  
Gray with black stripe  
Grau mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Серый с черной  
полосой  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
Grau  
Grün mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Grün  
Lila mit schwarzem  
Lila  
Серый  
Зеленый Streifen  
Пурпурный  
Зеленый с черной  
полосой  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Anschließen der externen Verstärker und/oder Subwoofer / Подключение внешних  
усилителей и/или низкочастотного динамика  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Sie können Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.  
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an  
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses  
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.  
Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной  
стереосистемы.  
•
Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой  
полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования  
так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the • Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses  
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.  
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного  
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте  
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства  
неиспользованными.  
Remote lead  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Провод внешнего устройства  
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the  
metallic body or to the chassis of the  
car—to the place not coated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before  
attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit  
der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des  
Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht  
lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle  
lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack  
der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter  
befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht  
ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann  
dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий  
провод к металлическому кузову  
или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не  
покрытом краской (если оно покрыто  
краской, удалите краску перед тем, как  
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение  
этого требования может привести к  
повреждению данного устройства.  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern  
vorhanden  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
3
*
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние  
JVC-усилитель  
Subwoofer  
громкоговорители  
Subwoofer  
Низкочастотный  
динамик  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC-усилитель  
3
*
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние громкоговорители  
Front speakers (see diagram  
)
Front speakers  
Vordere Lautsprecher  
Передние  
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan  
)
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему  
)
громкоговорители  
5
5
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO  
connector and connect them to the amplifier.  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC-усилитель  
4
4
*
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des  
ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und  
schließen diese an den Verstärker an.  
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät  
mitgeliefert)  
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект  
поставки)  
5
4
*
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей  
разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.  
*
D
Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Подключение внешних устройств  
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod® oder JVC D. Player / Устройство автоматической смены  
компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, Apple iPod® или проигрыватель JVC D.  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „CHANGER“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 17 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) /  
Установите для внешнего входа значение “CHANGER” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17.)  
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
Sie können diese Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod*6 oder D. Player kann mit einem Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)—KS-PD100  
(für iPod) oder KS-PD500 (für D. Player).  
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект  
поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).  
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Anschluss 1 (integrierter Anschluss) /  
Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)  
Apple iPod  
(separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)  
Apple iPod  
CAUTION / ACHTUNG / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:  
(продается отдельно)  
or  
oder  
или  
•
Before connecting the external components,  
make sure that the unit is turned off.  
JVC D. player  
(separately purchased)  
JVC D. Player  
(getrennt gekauft)  
Проигрыватель JVC D.  
(продается отдельно)  
• Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten  
sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.  
• Перед подключением внешних компонентов  
убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.  
JVC CD changer  
JVC DAB tuner  
CD-Wechsler von JVC  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Устройство автоматической  
Тюнер DAB JVC  
смены компакт-дисков JVC  
CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /  
Разъем устройства автоматической  
смены компакт-дисков  
6
*
*
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc.,  
eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.  
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer,  
Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других  
странах.  
6
6
Apple iPod  
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) /  
Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)  
(separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)  
Apple iPod  
(продается отдельно)  
or  
7
7
7
*
*
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or  
DAB tuner  
oder  
или  
JVC D. player  
(separately purchased)  
JVC D. Player  
(getrennt gekauft)  
Проигрыватель JVC D.  
(продается отдельно)  
Anschließen des für CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner  
mitgelieferten Kabels  
JVC CD changer  
or  
oder  
или  
JVC DAB tuner  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Тюнер DAB JVC  
Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект  
поставки устройства автоматической смены  
компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB  
CD-Wechsler von JVC  
Устройство автоматической  
смены компакт-дисков JVC  
CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /  
Разъем устройства автоматической  
смены компакт-дисков  
Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / Другое внешнее устройство  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „EXT IN“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 17 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / Установите для  
внешнего входа значение “EXT IN” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17.)  
External component  
Externe Komponente  
Внешнее устройство  
CD changer jack  
External component  
8
*
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
Buchse für CD-Wechsler  
Разъем устройства  
автоматической смены  
компакт-дисков  
Externe Komponente  
8
8
Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Внешнее устройство  
9
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
AUX-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS U58  
(не входит в комплект поставки)  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker  
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм  
9
*
*
9
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту  
E
дистанционного управления  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.  
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)  
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не  
поставляется)  
Steering wheel remote input  
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung  
Вход рулевого пульта  
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern.  
Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht im  
Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.  
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно  
использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого пульта  
дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля. За более  
подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.  
дистанционного управления  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)  
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в  
автомобиле)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
KD-G727  
В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы  
(годности) данного товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни,  
здоровья потребителя, причинять вред его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7)  
лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем, в течение которого потребитель данного  
товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения инструкции по эксплуатации  
данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных материалов  
и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.  
Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут  
храниться в течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.  
Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов,  
упомянутых в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в  
частности, гарантийного свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о  
правах потребителя или других законов, связанных с ним.  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 7.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
GET0358-001A  
[EE]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
How to use the MODE button  
If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions  
mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞  
buttons work as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Time countdown indicator  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
To use these buttons for their original  
functions again after pressing MODE, wait for  
5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons  
until the functions mode is cleared or press  
MODE again.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to read this manual  
• Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations in the table below.  
CONTENTS  
• Some related tips and notes are explained in  
“More about this unit” (see pages 22 – 25).  
Control panel ...................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...............  
4
5
Getting started.................................  
Basic operations....................................................  
7
7
Press briefly.  
Radio operations ..............................  
8
Press repeatedly.  
FM RDS operations............................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
9
9
Press either  
one.  
Disc/USB memory operations............. 11  
Playing a disc in the unit ....................................... 11  
Playing discs in the CD changer............................. 11  
Playing from a USB memory ................................. 12  
Press and hold until your  
desired response begins.  
Sound adjustments........................... 15  
General settings — PSM ................... 16  
Title assignment............................... 18  
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 19  
Other external component operations ..... 20  
DAB tuner operations........................ 21  
More about this unit ......................... 22  
Maintenance .................................... 25  
Troubleshooting............................... 26  
Specifications................................... 29  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same time.  
The following marks are used to indicate...  
: Built-in CD player operations.  
: External CD changer operations.  
: External USB memory operations.  
: Indicator displayed for the  
corresponding operation.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
1 BAND button  
2 • Control dial  
9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal  
p SRC (source) button  
•
(standby/on attenuator) button  
q
(control panel release) button  
3 DISP (display) button  
4 Remote sensor  
w SEL (select) button  
e MODE button  
r EQ (equalizer) button  
t MO (monaural) button  
y SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
button  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to  
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial  
lighting).  
5 Display window  
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)  
button  
u Number buttons  
i RPT (repeat) button  
o RND (random) button  
8 0 (eject) button  
;
4/¢  
buttons  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching...  
Attaching...  
Lever  
CAUTION:  
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the  
panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock  
position before attaching the panel.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display window  
a Track information indicators—TAG (ID3  
l Tracks type indicators*—WMA, MP3  
/ Playback source indicators*—CH (CD  
changer), DISC (built-in CD player)  
z EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tag),  
(track/file),  
(folder)  
s Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
d RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG  
f Main display  
g Tr (track) indicator  
x Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)  
indicators—USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,  
POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ  
h LOUD (loudness) indicator  
j Source display / Volume level indicator  
k Playback mode / item indicators—  
•
also works as the time countdown  
indicator and level meter during play (see  
page 17).  
RND (random),  
RPT (repeat)  
(disc),  
(folder),  
*
lights up for the selected item.  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Caution:  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is  
no obstacle in between.  
Continued on the next page  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/  
USB.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an  
MP3-compatible CD changer:  
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.  
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,  
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod or a  
®
JVC D. player:  
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with  
D ∞.  
– Enter the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the  
menu selecting buttons.)*  
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
4 SOUND button  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom  
equalizer).  
5 SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations (or services) if  
pressed briefly.  
Main elements and features  
• Searches for ensembles if pressed and  
held.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player  
(in menu selecting mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,  
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and  
held.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is  
on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with  
5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations (or services)  
with D ∞.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound,  
press it again.  
Basic operations  
~
Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
16 – 18.  
1
2
* You cannot select these sources if they  
are not ready or not connected.  
!
⁄
1 Canceling the display  
demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
For FM/AM tuner  
For DAB tuner  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust  
the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then  
adjust the minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
Adjust the volume.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level indicator  
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be  
lost.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO  
indicator goes off.  
Selected band appears.  
!
Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
When a station is received, searching  
stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you  
want to store into.  
Note:  
FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz  
FM3: 65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz  
2
3
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
“SSM” appears, then disappears when  
automatic presetting is over.  
2 Select a desired station frequency.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM  
band.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
FM RDS operations  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations  
to send an additional signal along with their  
regular programme signals.  
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
2
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the  
following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY  
Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)  
• Programme Search (see page 17)  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your  
favorite programme by searching for a PTY  
code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see  
page 10.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
~
Ÿ
The last selected PTY  
code appears.  
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you  
want.  
Select one of your favorite  
programme types.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 11.  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 10).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
!
Start searching for your favorite  
programme.  
If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code as you  
have selected, that station is tuned in.  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)  
from any source other than AM.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume  
level if the current level is lower than the preset  
level (see page 17).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme)  
indicator either lights up or  
flashes.  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby  
Reception is activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs  
when you are listening to an FM station  
without the RDS signals required for TA  
Standby Reception.)  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals. The  
TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.  
1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to  
switch temporarily to your favorite PTY  
programme from any source other than AM.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code  
for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby  
Reception is activated.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other  
PTY codes into other preset numbers.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby  
Reception is not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in  
to another station providing these signals. The  
PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain  
lit.  
Disc/USB memory  
operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,  
select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16).  
The PTY indicator goes off.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception  
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the  
same network, possibly broadcasting the same  
programme with stronger signals (see the  
illustration below).  
To stop play and eject the disc  
Playing discs in the CD changer  
All discs in the magazine will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-  
Tracking Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.  
~
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
* If you have changed the external input  
setting to “EXT IN” (see page 17), you  
cannot select the CD changer.  
Ÿ
Select a disc.  
For disc number from 01 – 06:  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
For disc number from 07 – 12:  
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency =  
Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About MP3 and WMA tracks  
Playing from a USB memory  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a  
USB memory.  
All tracks in the USB memory will be played  
repeatedly until you change the source.  
• Removing the USB memory will also stop  
playback.  
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and  
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded  
in “folders.”  
About the CD changer  
It is recommended to use a JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible  
CD changers. However, these units are not  
compatible with MP3 discs.  
~
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and  
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.  
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD  
changer.  
• Disc text information recorded in the CD  
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text  
compatible CD changer is connected.  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
USB input terminal  
Ÿ
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
USB memory  
If a USB memory has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3/WMA/USB)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB memory is currently  
attached, playback starts from the beginning.  
For MP3 tracks:  
For WMA tracks:  
To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out  
from the unit.  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might  
hinder your safety driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been  
backed up to avoid losing the data.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly  
2
3
Each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected and vice versa.  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/  
USB, it is required that folders are assigned  
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their  
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder (for  
MP3/WMA/USB):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
Only possible on JVC  
MP3-compatible CD changer  
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks  
within the same folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track  
whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes at a time.  
1
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
7 Repeat play  
While playing an MP3/WMA 2 disc or a  
*
USB memory  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 18)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder.  
DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
7 Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current  
folder, then tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
: Clock with the current track number  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc  
or USB memory.  
1
2
3
*
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD,  
“NO NAME” appears.  
Only for the built-in CD player and external  
USB memory.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag  
information, folder name and file name  
appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will  
not light up.  
MAG RND*5 : All tracks of the inserted  
discs.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
4
*
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/  
USB).  
Only while playing discs in the CD  
changer.  
5
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to  
the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
1
2
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at low volume level.  
SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
+03  
+01  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]  
Adjust the volume.  
(Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC  
+01  
+04  
+02  
+02  
–02  
+01  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
1
(Classical music)  
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,  
the adjustment you have made is stored for  
the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)  
including “USER.”  
POPS (Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the  
fader level to “00.”  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control  
setting. (See page 18 for details.)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+03  
OFF  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
Indication pattern changes  
as you adjust the level.  
Ex.: When “TRE” is selected  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)  
items listed in the table that follows.  
3 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
2 Select a PSM item.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
5 Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
DEMO  
DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated  
automatically if no operation is done for about  
20 seconds, [7].  
Display demonstration  
DEMO OFF : Cancels.  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
0 – 23 (1 – 12), [7]  
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59, [7]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
12H O 24H, [7]  
[Initial: 24H]  
CLK ADJ  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted  
using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.  
: Cancels.  
When the received signals from the current FM RDS station become  
weak...  
AF-REG  
Alternative frequency/  
AF  
: [Initial]; Switches to another station (the programme  
may differ from the one currently received), [11].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
regionalization  
reception  
AF REG  
OFF  
: Switches to another station broadcasting the same  
programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “AF ON”).  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [10].  
OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [10] = (back to the beginning)  
PTY-STBY  
PTY standby  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TA VOL  
[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*1, [10]  
Traffic announcement  
volume  
P-SEARCH  
ON  
: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another frequency  
Programme search  
broadcasting the same programme as the original  
preset RDS station is if the preset station signals are not  
sufficient.  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
DAB AF*2  
Alternative frequency  
AF ON  
: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services  
and FM RDS stations, [11, 22].  
: Cancels.  
reception  
AF OFF  
DAB VOL*2  
You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB tuner  
to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.  
[Initial: VOL 00]  
DAB volume  
adjustment  
LEVEL  
Audio level meter  
ON  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Activates the audio level indicator.  
: Cancels; sound mode indicator is shown.  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
: Activates dimmer.  
: Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
TEL  
MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds  
Telephone muting  
while using a cellular phone.  
: [Initial]; Cancels.  
OFF  
SCROLL*3  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.  
: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).  
: Cancels.  
Scroll  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
WOOFER  
LOW  
MID  
: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
HIGH  
: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
EXT IN*4  
External input  
CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [11], an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player, [19].  
EXT IN  
: To use any other external component than the above,  
[20].  
1
2
3
4
*
*
*
*
Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18).  
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, or USB.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/  
WMA tracks, [14].  
Tag display  
TAG OFF : Cancels.  
You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.  
LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of  
the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being  
damaged.)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
filter  
AUTO  
WIDE  
: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce  
interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect  
may be lost.)  
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect  
will remain.  
Title assignment  
You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit  
and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30  
discs and each title up to 32 characters.  
• You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an  
MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.  
3 Assign a title.  
1 Select a character.  
1 Select the sources.  
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.  
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select  
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.  
Available characters  
Display indications  
2 Enter the title assignment mode.  
Ex.: When “CD“ is selected as the source  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations:  
Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the  
external input setting, see page 17.  
2 Move to the next (or previous)  
character position.  
~
Ÿ
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you  
finish entering the title.  
4 Finish the procedure.  
Playback starts automatically from  
where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2  
previously.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 on page 18...  
!
⁄
Adjust the volume.  
iPod®/D. player operations  
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod  
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or  
D. player is deactivated.  
Before operating your iPod or D. player:  
Connect either one of the following (separately  
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear  
of this unit.  
To pause*1 or stop*2  
playback  
To resume playback,  
press it again.  
• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for  
®
controlling an iPod.  
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for  
controlling a D. player.  
To fast-forward or  
reverse the track  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied  
with the interface adapter.  
To go to the next or  
previous tracks  
Caution:  
1
*
*
For iPod  
For D. player  
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the  
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting  
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.  
2
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ONE RPT  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of  
the iPod or “Repeat Mode = One” for the  
D. player.  
1 Enter the main menu.  
ALL RPT  
Now the 5/∞/ 4/¢  
buttons  
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the  
iPod or “Repeat Mode = All” for the D.  
player.  
work as the menu selecting buttons*3.  
3
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about  
5 seconds.  
RPT OFF  
Cancels.  
– When you confirm the selection of a  
track.  
7
Random play  
2 Select the desired menu.  
ALBM RND*  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of  
the iPod.  
For iPod:  
SONG RND/RND ON  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS  
Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the  
beginning)  
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of  
the iPod or “Random Play = On” of the D.  
player.  
For D. player:  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE  
Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)  
RND OFF  
Cancels.  
* For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in  
“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”  
3 Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
To check other information while listening to  
an iPod or a D. player  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you  
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3  
until the desired track is played.  
• Holding  
4/¢  
can skip 10  
items at a time.  
Other external component  
operations  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
You can connect an external component to  
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line  
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX  
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection  
Manual (separate volume).  
2 Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For listening to the USB memory, see pages  
12 – 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 – 20.  
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do  
the following:  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see  
“DAB AF” on page 17).  
~
It is recommended to use DAB tuner  
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have  
another DAB tuner, consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for  
your DAB tuner.  
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 17  
and select the external input (“EXT IN”).  
Ÿ
!
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
~
Ÿ
Adjust the volume.  
!
Start searching for an ensemble.  
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 15.)  
When an ensemble is received, searching  
stops.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an external component  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
⁄
Select a service (either primary or  
secondary) to listen to.  
EXT IN Ô Clock  
DAB tuner operations  
What is DAB system?  
To tune in to an ensemble manually  
Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !  
above...  
1
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can  
deliver digital quality sound without any  
annoying interference and signal distortion.  
Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and  
data. When transmitting, DAB combines  
several programmes (called “services”) to form  
one “ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—  
called “primary service”—can also be divided  
into its components (called “secondary  
service”). A typical ensemble has six or more  
programmes (services) broadcast at the same  
time.  
2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• While receiving an FM RDS station:  
When driving in an area where a DAB service  
is broadcasting the same programme as the  
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.  
When shipped from the factory, Alternative  
Frequency Reception is activated.  
Storing DAB services in memory  
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for  
each band.  
1 Select a service you want (see page 21).  
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency  
Reception, see page 17.  
2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you  
want to store into.  
To change the display information while  
tuning to an ensemble  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Service name = Ensemble name = Channel  
number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
More about this unit  
Tuning in to a preset DAB service  
1
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also  
turn on the power. If the source is ready,  
playback also starts.  
2 Select the preset DAB service  
(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
If the selected primary service has some  
secondary services, pressing the same  
button again will tune in to the secondary  
services.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
–All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
–Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
–When SSM is over, the station stored in  
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the  
previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Alternative Frequency Reception  
You can keep listening to the same programme  
by activating the Alternative Frequency  
Reception.  
• While receiving a DAB service:  
When driving in an area where a service  
cannot be received, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS  
station, broadcasting the same programme.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM RDS operations  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires  
two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme  
Identification) and AF (Alternative  
Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-  
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by  
TA Standby Reception, the volume level  
automatically changes to the preset level (TA  
VOL) if the current level is lower than the  
preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception  
is activated (with AF selected), Network-  
Tracking Reception is also activated  
automatically. On the other hand, Network-  
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 16.)  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same  
type which are first detected if a disc includes  
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/  
WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, or for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with “Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective  
seal stuck to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
«http://www.rds.org.uk».  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damage to the unit.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/  
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),  
MP3, and WMA formats.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,  
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA  
files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
Inserting a disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down,  
“PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and  
unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into  
the loading slot.  
Playing a disc  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3  
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent  
sounds.  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory  
• While playing from a USB memory, the  
playback order may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
USB memories due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories  
and connection ports, some USB memories  
may not be attached properly or the  
connection might be loose.  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters  
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters  
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)  
characters  
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum  
number of characters for file/folder names in  
case the total number of files and folders is  
313 or more.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory  
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from  
pressing the 0 button.  
• If the connected USB memory does not have  
the correct files, “NO FILES” appears and the  
unit returns to the previous source.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,  
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
– Bit rate:  
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)  
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)  
WMA:5 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)  
WMA:8 kHz — 48 kHz  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for  
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128  
characters for MP3/WMA tag information.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files  
and 250 folders (999 files per folder).  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of  
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Changing the source  
Windows Media Audio.  
®
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again,  
playback starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is  
not constant.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
DAB tuner operations  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not  
work correctly on some vehicles, particularly  
on those having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to  
any other than “AUTO.”  
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted  
even when you store a secondary service.  
• A previously preset DAB service is erased  
when a new DAB service is stored in the same  
preset number.  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOL 30.”  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs,  
“NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can  
also be shown if you play back the disc from  
the unit and vice versa.  
iPod® or D. player operations  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all  
operations from the iPod or D. player are  
disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters  
cannot be shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of  
communication between the iPod or  
D. player and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than  
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see  
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Center holder  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player,  
some operations may not be performed  
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the  
following JVC web site:  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
Continued on the next page  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
To play new discs  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges  
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Sticker  
Stick-on label  
Sticker residue  
Warped disc  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the  
radio.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played  
back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot  
be skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component  
which you used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor  
ejected.  
• Unlock the disc (see page 13).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in  
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,  
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
the file names.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not  
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to  
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are  
you have intended them to play.  
recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
cyrillic alphabets, numbers, and a limited number  
of symbols (see page 18).  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.  
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• “CHECK” keeps flashing on the  
display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB  
memory.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• “NO FILES” flashes on the display.  
Attach a USB memory that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate format.  
• “NOT SUPP” appears on the display The track is unplayable.  
and track skips.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear  
alternately on the display, then  
returns to the previous source.  
• The attached USB memory may be  
malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted  
correctly. The files included in the USB memory  
are corrupted.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory  
repeatedly while “CHECK” appears on the  
display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is  
sometimes interrupted.  
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied  
into the USB memory.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB  
memory, and try again.  
Continued on the next page  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “NO MAG” appears on the display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Insert a disc into the magazine.  
Insert the magazine.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn  
on or does not work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
Change the battery.  
•
• Buttons do not work as intended.  
• The sound is distorted.  
The functions of the buttons have been changed.  
Press MODE before performing the operation.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
the display.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart the playback operation using the  
control panel (see page 19).  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display  
when connecting a D. player.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”  
appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on  
the display.  
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.  
not work after disconnecting from  
this unit.  
• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and  
reset the unit (see page 2).  
• “ANTENANG” appears on the  
display.  
Check the cords and connections.  
• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly  
and reset the unit (see page 2).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Front: 50 W per channel  
Rear: 50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Tone Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
®
Bass:  
10 dB at 100 Hz  
Format:  
Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Playable USB memory:  
Format: FAT 12/16/32  
Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Other Terminal: CD changer  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
FM1/FM2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
FM3  
AM  
: 65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz  
: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
[MW Tuner]  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Sensitivity: 20 μV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
[LW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 μV  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства  
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу  
EN, RU  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G727  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
GET0358-002A  
[EE]  
1205DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, RU  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
РУССКИЙ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом на  
массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор напряжения, который  
может быть приобретен у дилера автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
WARNINGS  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
Notes:  
Примечания:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR • Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем указанного класса. Если предохранитель  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
сгорает слишком часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и  
передней панели устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если максимальная  
мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их  
повреждение (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей  
лентой.  
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во время  
удаления устройства.  
Heat sink  
Радиатор  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению  
громкоговорителей:  
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе  
устройство будет повреждено.  
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю питания громкоговорителя  
проверьте схему соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit.  
If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Список деталей для установки и подключения  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером автомобильного  
специалиста JVC.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Жесткий футляр/панель  
управления  
Sleeve  
Муфта  
Trim plate  
Декоративную панель  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Кабель питания  
Washer (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)  
I
K
L
J
Rubber cushion  
Резиновый чехол  
Remote controller  
диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния  
Battery  
Бaтapeйкa  
Handles  
Рычаги  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы,  
касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в  
компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к  
квалифицированному специалисту.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Выполните необходимые подключения  
контактов, как показано на оборотной  
стороне этой инструкции.  
1
*
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage the  
fuse on the rear.  
1
*
Устанавливайте  
устройство таким  
образом, чтобы не  
повредить  
предохранитель,  
расположенный сзади.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Removing the unit  
Удаление устройства  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните  
их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы  
вынуть устройство.  
When using the optional stay / При использовании  
дополнительной стойки  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства без  
использования муфты  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
В автомобилях “Toyota”, например, сначала удалите автомобильную магнитолу, затем установите на ее место  
это устройство.  
Fire wall  
Стена  
Stay (option)  
Стойка (дополнительно)  
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Не входит в комплект.  
2
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Dashboard  
Приборная панель  
Bracket*2  
Кронштейн *2  
Screw (option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Pocket  
Карман  
Bracket*2  
Кронштейн *2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Питание не включается.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Звук искажен.  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью более  
короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
* Have you reset your unit?  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
connector / Если автомобиль оснащен  
разъемом ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi  
или Opel (Vauxhall)  
A
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений  
Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1  
From the car body  
От корпуса автомобиля  
ISO connector  
Разъем ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
соединений  
2.  
Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2  
Y: Yellow  
R: Red  
Красный  
Желтый  
View from the lead side  
Вид со стороны выводов  
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное  
подключение может привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном ниже порядке.  
3 Подключите кабель антенны.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
To subwoofer (see diagram  
К низкочастотный динамик (см. схему  
)
)
Aerial  
connector  
Разъем  
антенны  
15 A fuse  
Предохранитель 15 A  
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Не входит в комплект  
Ignition switch  
Переключатель зажигания  
1
Rear ground terminal  
Задний разъем  
заземления  
Black  
Черный  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Line out (see diagram  
К выходу (см. схему  
)
)
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Yellow *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя  
To external components (see diagram  
К внешним устройствам (см. схему  
)
)
Желтый*2  
(минуя блок зажигания) (постоянный 12 В)  
Red  
Красный  
Fuse block  
Блок предохранителя  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
2
2
*
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  
power cannot be turned on.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите  
этот провод, иначе питание не включится.  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
Blue with white stripe  
Синий с белой полосой  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)  
Orange with white stripe  
Оранжевый с белой полосой  
To car light control switch  
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля  
Brown  
Коричневый  
To cellular phone system  
К системе сотового телефона  
White with black stripe  
Белый с черной  
полосой  
White  
Белый  
Gray with black stripe  
Серый с черной  
полосой  
Gray  
Серый  
Green with black stripe  
Зеленый с черной  
полосой  
Green  
Зеленый  
Purple with black stripe  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Purple  
Пурпурный  
Left speaker (front)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Right speaker (front)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Правый  
громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Подключение внешних усилителей и/или Низкочастотный динамик  
C
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы.  
•
Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего  
устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.  
•
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of  
this unit unused.  
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства, подключите их к усилителю.  
Оставьте провода громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.  
Remote lead  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Провод внешнего устройства Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC-усилитель  
Rear speakers  
Задние  
Subwoofer  
Низкочастотный  
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the  
громкоговорители  
metallic body or to the chassis of the  
car—to the place not coated with paint (if  
coated with paint, remove the paint before  
attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий  
провод к металлическому кузову  
или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не  
покрытом краской (если оно покрыто  
краской, удалите краску перед тем, как  
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение  
этого требования может привести к  
повреждению данного устройства.  
динамик  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC-усилитель  
3
*
Rear speakers  
Задние громкоговорители  
Front speakers  
Передние  
громкоговорители  
Front speakers (see diagram  
)
Передние  
громкоговорители (см. схему  
)
5
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s  
ISO connector and connect them to the  
amplifier.  
Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков  
для разъема ISO автомобиля и  
подсоедините их к усилителю.  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC-усилитель  
4
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект  
поставки)  
5
*
4
*
D Connecting the external components / Подключение внешних устройств  
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, проигрыватель Apple iPod® или JVC D.  
• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) Установите для внешнего входа значение “CHANGER” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17.)  
/
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).  
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект  
поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).  
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное  
соединение)  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (продается отдельно)  
or  
или  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)  
JVC CD changer  
Проигрыватель  
нескольких  
JVC DAB tuner  
Тюнер DAB JVC  
CAUTION / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:  
• Before connecting the external  
components, make sure that the unit  
is turned off.  
• Перед подключением устройства  
автоматической смены  
компакт-дисков JVC  
CD changer jack  
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков  
компакт-дисков, что приемник  
отключен.  
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное  
соединение)  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (продается отдельно)  
6
*
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,  
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
iPod является торговоймаркой Apple  
Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в  
США и других странах.  
6
*
or  
JVC D. player (separately purchased)  
или  
Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)  
JVC CD changer  
Проигрыватель  
нескольких  
7
7
*
*
Connecting cord supplied for your CD  
changer or DAB tuner  
Подключение кабеля, входящего  
в комплект поставки устройства  
автоматической смены  
JVC DAB tuner  
Тюнер DAB JVC  
or  
или  
компакт-дисков JVC  
CD changer jack  
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков  
компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB  
Other external component / Другое внешнее устройство  
• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
/
Установите для внешнего входа значение “EXT IN” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17.)  
External component  
Внешнее устройство  
CD changer jack  
Разъем устройства  
автоматической смены  
компакт-дисков  
External component  
Внешнее устройство  
8
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)  
Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект  
поставки)  
8
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5  
9
9
*
*
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)  
Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58  
(не входит в комплект поставки)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Ingersoll Rand Water Pump 650949 X User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware PCI 6886 User Manual
John Lewis Oven JLBIDOS904 User Manual
JVC Portable CD Player RC BZ5LB User Manual
JVC Stereo System CA DXU20 User Manual
Kenmore Gas Grill 1481615421 User Manual
King Canada Dust Collector KC 3105KWRC User Manual
KitchenAid Ventilation Hood 883298 User Manual
Kompernass Boiler KH 1135 User Manual
Konica Minolta Film Camera DYNAX40M User Manual